Agenda 2.0 Help File

» Index

How to Use Help

PURPOSE       Help displays quick answers to your questions about Agenda.

STEPS         1. Press F1 (HELP) for assistance on your current activity.
              2. Use keys shown below to look for other info while in Help.
              3. Press F9 (RETURN) or ESC to leave Help and return to work.

LOOK          PRESS               TO DO THIS
FOR INFO      ------------------  -------------------------------------------
              , , , , HOME,   Highlight any related topic shown in bold
              END then ENTER      to display Help info about it (you can also
                                  highlight topic by typing its first letter)

              F3 (INDEX)          Choose from an index of Help topics

              F5 (FIND)           Type a topic you want to search for in Help

              F6 (KEYS)           Display info on Agenda keys and commands

              F8 (REVIEW) or      Travel back through the Help screens you
              BACKSPACE           just looked at

Find a Help Topic

STEPS         In Help:
               F5 (FIND)

TYPE THE      Once you press F5, Help prompts for the topic that you want
TOPIC         info about.  Type a word (example: item) or phrase (example:
              category manager) and press ENTER.

SELECT A      Help then displays a list of Help screens about this word or
SCREEN        phrase.  Here's how to use the list:

              IF YOU WANT TO          DO THIS
              ----------------------  ----------------------------------------
              Select a Help screen    Highlight it (, , , , HOME, END)
              from the list           and press ENTER

              Display next/previous   Press ALT-N (NEXT) or ALT-P (PREVIOUS)
              screen from the list    from any Help screen

              Redisplay the list      Press F5 (FIND) and then ENTER
              for the current topic

Help Index

                               Pick a page and
                                 press ENTER

      +---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---+
      | A || B || C || D || E || F || G || H || I || J || K || L || M |
      +---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---+
      +---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---+
      | N || O || P || Q || R || S || T || U || V || W || X || Y || Z |
      +---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---++---+

                     To return to this screen: press F3

+---+  Abandon a file                  |       Alphabetize (See also Sort)
| A |  Actions                         |         Categories
+---+    Attach to a category          |         Items
         Clear                         |         View names
         Copy                          |       ALT keys
         Date                          |       Ancestor categories
         Execute                       |       Append
         Numeric                       |         Note text to a category
         Special                       |         Note text to an item
         Values                        |         Text to macros
       Add                             |       Applications, starter
         Categories                    |       Assignment
         Columns                       |         Automatic actions
         Files                         |         Automatic conditions
         Items                         |         Break
         Sections                      |         Categories, change
         Views                         |         Categories, enter
       Agenda, general                 |         Items
       AgendaTown                      |         Make
       Alarms                          |         Profile for item(s)
                                       |
       Attributes for printing         |       Categories
       Automatic assignment            |         Date
       Automatic completion            |         Demote
       Automatic reservation           |         Discard
                                       |         Edit
+---+  Back up files                   |         Enter
| B |  Boxes, fill in                  |         Exclusivity for
+---+  Break assignments               |         Filters for
       Browse through dates            |         Hierarchy of
                                       |         MAIN
+---+  Calendar                        |         Notes for
| C |  Categories                      |         Numeric
+---+    Actions for                   |         Parent categories
         Add new                       |         Promote
         Assign to an item             |         Properties of
         Child categories              |         Protection for
         Column entries                |         Remove
         Column heads                  |         Replace
         Commands for                  |         Section heads
         Conditions for                |         Select
                                       |
       Categories (continued)          |       Colors, change
         Sort                          |       Columns
         Standard                      |         Add
         Types of                      |         Ancestor format
         Unindexed                     |         Categories notes as heads
       Category manager                |         Child categories as heads
         Commands for                  |         Commands for
         Indicators in                 |         Date
         Keys for                      |         Edit
         Print in                      |         Entries in
       Category notes                  |         Formats for
         Use as column title           |         Heads, select
       Child categories                |         Item column
         Exclusive children            |         Link to other sections
         Use as section heads          |         Move
       Choices                         |         Numeric
       Clear                           |         Parent:Category format
         Conditions/actions            |         Properties of
         Filters                       |         Properties, change
         Notes                         |         Properties, item column
                                       |
       Columns (continued)             |       Conditions
         Remove                        |         Copy
         Star format                   |         Date
         Types of                      |         Execute
         Unindexed                     |         Numeric
         Width, adjust                 |         Remove
         Yes/No format                 |         Text
       Commands                        |         Values for
         Cancel with ESC               |       Confirm mode
         Charts of                     |       Copy
         Function key commands         |         Conditions/actions
         Issue                         |         Files
         Macro commands                |         Items
         Menu commands                 |         Text
       Compress files                  |         Views
       Conditions                      |       Create (See Add)
         Actions, compared to          |       Customize (See also Properties)
         Assignment                    |         Colors
         Attach to a category          |         Date formats
         Clear                         |         Screen
                                       |
+---+  Dates                           |       Datebook views (See also Views)
| D |    Calendar, pop-up              |         Add
+---+    Done dates                    |         Browse through dates
         Enter                         |       Delete (See Remove and Discard)
         Entry dates                   |       Directory (See Files)
         Formats for                   |       Discard
         Global settings for           |         Categories
         Ranges of                     |         Items
         Times                         |       Display
         When dates                    |       Done dates
       Date categories                 |       Done items
         Actions for                   |         Export
         Add new                       |         Hide in a view
         Columns                       |       DOS, exit to
         Conditions for                |
         Filters for                   |+---+  Edit
       Date columns                    || E |    Categories
         Properties of                 |+---+    Column heads
                                       |         Items
                                       |         Keys
                                       |
       Edit (continued)                |       External files
         Macros                        |         Macros
         Mode                          |         Notes
         Notes                         |
       Empty the trash                 |+---+  Family, categories
       Enter (See Add)                 || F |  Files
       Entry dates                     |+---+    Abandon
       Erase, files (See also Discard) |         Backup
       Exclusive categories            |         Commands for
       Execute conditions and actions  |         Create
       Exit (See also Launch)          |         Description for
         Agenda                        |         Erase
         Category manager              |         Export
         Help                          |         External macro files
         Note                          |         External note files
         To operating system           |         Import
       Export                          |         Maintenance of
         Done items                    |         Network
         Files                         |         Password for
                                       |         Properties of
                                       |
       Files (continued)               |       Formats
         Reservation for               |         Columns
         Retrieve                      |         Date
         Save                          |         Print
         Select                        |       Function key maps
         Size of                       |
         Structured                    |+---+  Headers, printed pages
         Transfer                      || H |  Hide
       Fill in a box                   |+---+    Conditions/actions
       Filter                          |         Dependent items
         Attach                        |         Done items
         Browse through dates          |         Empty sections
         Clear                         |         Inherited items
         Date                          |
         Numeric                       |+---+  Import
         Section                       || I |    Files
         Values for                    |+---+    Macros
         View                          |         Notes
       Fonts                           |       Indent
       Footers, printed pages          |       Indicators on the screen
                                       |
       Information                     |       Items
         Categories                    |         Edit
         Items                         |         Enter
       Initial section                 |         Hide
       Initial view                    |         Mark
       Input (See Add)                 |         Move
       Insert (See Add and Edit)       |         Notes for
       International (See Customize)   |         Number
       Items                           |         Prerequisite
         Add new                       |         Print
         Assign to categories          |         Profile of assignments for
         Assignment profile for        |         Properties of
         Break assignments of          |         Properties, item column
         Column, item                  |         Recover
         Commands for                  |         Remove (See also Discard)
         Conditions/actions, apply to  |         Search
         Copy                          |         Section heads for
         Dependent                     |         Sort
         Discard (See also Remove)     |         Split into two items
         Done                          |         Undiscard
                                       |
+---+  Launch another program          |       Macros
| L |  Learn mode (macros)             |         Manager
+---+  Limits                          |         Properties of
         File size                     |         Run
         Items                         |         Variables in
         Memory                        |       MAIN category
         Notes                         |       Margins, for printing
       Lines, print                    |       Mark items
       Link columns                    |       Markers
       List of items (See Sections)    |         Attribute
       LM2STF utility                  |         Display choices
       Locate (See Search, Text Match) |         Enter in text
                                       |         Settings for
+---+  Macros                          |       Match strength
| M |    Commands in                   |       Memory limits, change
+---+    Edit                          |       Menu commands
         Import                        |         Category manager
         Indicators for                |         Macros
         Keys for                      |         Notes
         Learn mode                    |         Views
                                       |
       Move (See also Sort)            |       Numeric categories
         Columns                       |         Actions for
         Items                         |         Conditions for
         Sections                      |         Enter values in
                                       |         Filters for
+---+  Named print sets                |       Numeric columns
| N |    Commands for                  |         Add new
+---+  Network files                   |         Calculations in
         Reservations for              |         Properties of
         Save read-only files          |+---+
       New (See Add)                   || O |  Open (See File Retrieve)
       Notes                           |+---+
         Category notes                |+---+  Pages, print
         Clear                         || P |  Parent categories
         Commands for                  |+---+  Passwords
         Edit                          |       Paste text (See also Edit)
         Enter                         |       Pop-up calendar
         External files for            |       Position (See Move and Sort)
         Keys for                      |       Preferences (See Customize)
         Print                         |       Preview printouts
         Search for text in            |

       Printers, select                |       Properties
       Print                           |         Macros
         Attributes                    |         Sections
         Commands for                  |         Views
         Final                         |
         Fonts                         |+---+  Question assignments
         Footers                       || Q |  Quit Agenda (See also Return)
         Headers                       |+---+
         Items                         |+---+  Recover
         Layout                        || R |    Damaged files
         Named print sets              |+---+    Discarded items from trash
         Notes                         |         Removed items
         Preview a printout            |       Remove (See also Clear)
         Set up                        |         Categories
       Profile, assignment             |         Columns
       Properties                      |         Items
         Categories                    |         Sections
         Columns                       |         Views
         Files                         |       Rename (See Edit)
         Items                         |       Replace categories
                                       |
       Reservations for files          |       Search for text in items/notes
         Get                           |       Sections
         Release                       |         Add
         Save an unreserved file       |         Child categories as heads
       Retrieve a file                 |         Columns in
         Create a new file             |         Commands for
         Select a file                 |         Filters for
       Return from (See also ESC)      |         Go to
         Category manager              |         Heads, select
         Help                          |         Item column of
         Macro editor                  |         Move
         Note                          |         Properties of
         View manager                  |         Properties, change
       Run another program (Launch)    |         Remove
                                       |         Sort
+---+  Save                            |       Select (See also Boxes/Choices)
| S |    Automatic save setting        |         Categories
+---+    Backups                       |         Column heads
         Files                         |         Files
         Named print sets              |         Section heads
                                       |
       Settings (See Add, Properties)  |       Switch views
       Shortcuts                       |       Symbols on the screen
       Show schedules                  |       System, exit to
       Show views                      |
         Add                           |+---+  Templates, transfer
         Commands for                  || T |  Text
       Sort                            |+---+    Conditions
         Categories                    |         Edit
         Items                         |         Items
         Macros                        |         Match
         Sections                      |         Notes
         Views                         |         Print
       Special actions                 |         Search for
       Special keys                    |         Values in unindexed columns
       Start (See Run)                 |       Time
       Starter applications            |         Alarms
       Structured files                |         Display in column
         Import                        |         Enter
         TXT2STF utility               |         Formats for
       Suspend a session               |         Pop-up calendar
                                       |
       Transfer files                  |+---+  Variables in macro commands
         Export                        || V |  View manager
         Import                        |+---+    Add a new view
         Partial files                 |         Alphabetize view names
         Structured files              |         Discard a view
         Template                      |         Switch views
       Trash                           |       Views
         Empty, change settings for    |         Add
         Recover items from            |         Alphabetize
       TXT2STF utility                 |         Browse through dates
       Typefaces                       |         Columns in
                                       |         Commands for
+---+  Underline                       |         Copy
| U |  Undiscard items                 |         Datebook views
+---+  Unindexed categories            |         Discard
       Unmark items                    |         Filters for
       Update defaults                 |         Indicators in
       Utilities commands              |         Keys for
                                       |         Print
                                       |         Properties of
                                       |
       Views (continued)               |
         Sections in                   |
         Sort items in                 |
         Sort sections in              |
         Show views                    |
         Types of                      |
                                       |
+---+  When dates                      |
| W |  Widths of columns               |
+---+                                  |

AgendaTown J The Cast J AgendaTown

+------------------------+-(In Order of Appearance)-+------------------------+
|Todd Drake              |Sarah Meyer               |Bonnie Steinroeder      |
|Sharon Jason            |Maureen Kennedy           |Marjorie Clark          |
|Marc Germani            |Barbara Baird             |Marlena Rupp            |
|Diana MacDonald         |Fran Taussig              |Anna Marie Saintonge    |
|Steve Zagieboylo        |Sonjaya Tandon            |Eric d'Arbeloff         |
|Jeanne Heston           |Jamie MacEachern Clegg    |David Voncannon         |
|Bob Maher               |Susan Soley               |Marlene LoPresti        |
|Lynne Levine            |Susan Wood                |Maire Murphy            |
|David Burns             |Doug Fleming              |Joe Najjar              |
|Lauren Hasselriis-Ghom  |Karen Axelrod             |Julie Zinkus            |
|Andrew Hammond          |Steve Meister             |Larry Mancini           |
|Robin Palmer            |John Klobucher            |Scott Brown             |
|Beth Macy               |Don Bayly                 |Julie Haranzo           |
|Mike Kraley             |Roseann Lilly             |Alison Kuryla           |
|Paul Paget              |Julie Donnelly            |Chad Huemme             |
|Steve Szymanski         |Patty MacKinnon           |Dennis Archibald        |
|Polly Nichols           |Cathy Pawelczyk           |Donagh Noone            |
|Dianna Koukoutchos      |Sylvia Reed               |Kevin Shea              |
|Kaiss Kirata            |Mark VanDine              |The Cheshire Cat        |
|                        |Ron Turcotte              |                        |

Views: Main Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
File               Retrieve, create, save, manipulate Agenda files

Item               Assign, modify, discard, manipulate items in current view

Category           Add, modify, discard categories in current Agenda file

View               Add, modify, discard, browse views in current Agenda file
                   and manipulate columns, sections

Print              Print information from current view

Utilities          Manage and get info about your Agenda file and environment

System             Suspend Agenda session temporarily to use operating system

Quit               End Agenda session and exit to operating system (ALT-Q)

SEE ALSO

About views,   Use a menu,   About Agenda,   » Index

Views: File Command Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Retrieve           Retrieve or create an Agenda file (ALT-G)

Save               Save an Agenda file (ALT-W saves current file)

Abandon            Abandon all unsaved changes made to current Agenda file

Properties         Display, modify characteristics of current Agenda file

Transfer           Transfer info between current Agenda file and other files

Maintenance        Copy, erase, compress Agenda files or request a network
                   file reservation

SEE ALSO

About files,   Ways to import/export info,   Use a menu,   » Index

Views: File Transfer Command Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Import             Copy items, notes, categories from a structured text
                   file (STF) to current Agenda file

Export             Copy items, notes, categories from current Agenda file
                   to a structured text file

Template           Copy entire structure of current Agenda file (everything
                   but items) to another Agenda file

SEE ALSO

About files,   Ways to import/export info,   Use a menu,   » Index

Views: File Maintenance Command Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
MakeCopy           Save a copy of current Agenda file to a different file name

Erase              Delete an Agenda file from disk

Compress           Remove unused space from current Agenda file so it takes
                   up less room on disk

Reservation        Get or release a network reservation for current Agenda
                   file

SEE ALSO

About files,   Use a menu,   » Index

Views: Item Command Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Properties         Display, modify characteristics of current item (F6)

MakeAssign         Assign current item to a particular category (ALT-M)

Discard            Delete current item from file and place it in trash
                   (ALT-F4)

Undisc             Recover discarded item(s) from trash and insert them below
                   highlight in current section (ALT-Y recovers latest one)

BrkAssign          Break assignment of current item to section head -- so
                   item no longer appears in current section (DEL)

Reposition         Change order of items in current section by moving current
                   item

Alarm              Set an alarm on current item (ALT-A)

SEE ALSO

Use a menu,   About items,   » Index

Views/Category Manager: Category Command Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Properties         Display, modify characteristics of current category (F6)

Add                Add a new category to the category hierarchy

Discard            Delete current category from the category hierarchy --
                   which means it's completely deleted from current Agenda
                   file (ALT-F4)

SEE ALSO

About categories,   Use a menu,   » Index

Views: View Command Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Properties         Display, modify characteristics of current view (in view
                   manager: F6)

Add                Add a new view to current Agenda file (in view manager:
                   INS)

Browse             Browse through current view by date (ALT-B)

Discard            Delete current view from current Agenda file (in view
                   manager: F4 or ALT-F4 or DEL)

Column             Add, modify, remove, manipulate columns in current view

Section            Add, modify, remove, manipulate sections in current view

SEE ALSO

About views,   Use a menu,   » Index

Views: View Column Command Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Properties         Display, modify characteristics of current column (F6)

Add                Add a new column to current section or all sections (ALT-L
                   or ALT-R)

Remove             Remove current column from current section or all sections
                   (DEL)

Move               Change order of columns in current section by moving
                   current column (ALT-F10)

Width              Change width of current column

SEE ALSO

About columns,   Use a menu,   » Index

Views: View Section Command Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Properties         Display, modify characteristics of current section (F6)

Add                Add a new section to current view (ALT-D or ALT-U)

Remove             Remove current section from current view (DEL)

Move               Change order of sections in current view by moving current
                   section (ALT-F10)

SEE ALSO

Use a menu,   About sections,   » Index

Views: Print Command Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Final              Print items and notes from current view to printer or file

Preview            Display output on screen to see how it will look when
                   printed

Layout             Define page layout for printed view info (any layout
                   changes you make apply only to current Agenda file)

Setup              Select printers, ports, fonts, and preview display driver
                   to use with Agenda

Named              Use a separate file of print settings (including Final,
                   Preview, and Layout settings)

SEE ALSO

About printing,   Use a menu,   » Index

Views: Print Named Command Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Retrieve           Retrieve a print settings (NPS) file whose settings you
                   want to use as the defaults for the current Agenda file

Save               Save the Layout, Preview, and Final print settings from the
                   current Agenda file to a print settings file

Erase              Delete a print settings file from disk

Attach             Specify a print settings file from which the current view
                   is to get its print settings (doesn't affect other views)

Detach             Discontinue the current view's use of a print settings file
                   that has been attached to it

SEE ALSO

About printing,   Use a menu,   » Index

Views: Utilities Command Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Customize          Set personal preferences for your Agenda environment
                   (including colors and other screen display options)

Execute            Evaluate conditions and actions for all or part of current
                   Agenda file (ALT-E executes conditions/actions of current
                   category, ALT-X executes all conditions/actions in file)

Show               Display various info about items in current Agenda file

Questions          Confirm questionable (?) assignments in current Agenda
                   file

Trash              Clear all discarded items from trash (making them
                   unrecoverable)

Launch             Suspend Agenda session temporarily to run another program

SEE ALSO

Use a menu,   » Index

Views: Utilities Show Command Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Match              Show items that contain a particular word or phrase

Prereqs            Show items on which the current item depends (&)

Depends            Show items that depend on (&) the current item

ItemsDone          Show items that are marked done (!!)

Circular           Show items caught in circular references (o)

Alarm              Show items with pending or triggered alarms (@)

Sched              Show items assigned to a particular date

Every              Show all items in the current Agenda file

SEE ALSO

Use a menu,   About show views,   » Index

Views: Utilities Show Prereqs Command Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
One Level          Show items immediately prerequisite to current item

All Levels         Show entire chain of items prerequisite to current item

Every Item         Show every item that has prerequisites (all dependent
                   items)

SEE ALSO

Use a menu,   About show views,   » Index

Views: Utilities Show Depends Command Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
One Level          Show items immediately dependent on current item

All Levels         Show entire chain of items dependent on current item

Every Item         Show every item on which other items are dependent

SEE ALSO

Use a menu,   About show views,   » Index

Notes/Macro Editor: Main Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
File               Use an external file as source of current note/macro

Print              Print all or marked text from current note/macro

Import             Copy all text from an external file into current note/macro

Export             Copy all or marked text from current note/macro to an
                   external file

Clear              Delete entire contents of current note/macro

Return             Save current note/macro, exit from editor, and return to
                   previous activity (F5)

Quit               End Agenda session and exit to operating system (ALT-Q)

SEE ALSO

About macros,   Use a menu,   About notes,   » Index

Notes/Macro Editor: File Command Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Attach             Specify an external file as source (dynamically read and
                   updated) of current note/macro

Detach             Break link to external file and clear contents of current
                   note/macro (does not affect contents of external file)

Erase              Delete from disk the external file attached to current
                   note/macro

SEE ALSO

External macro files,   External note files,   Use a menu,   » Index

Notes/Macro Editor: Print Command Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Final              Print all or marked text from current note/macro to printer
                   or file

Preview            Display output on screen to see how it will look when
                   printed

Layout             Define page layout for printed note/macro info (any layout
                   changes you make apply only to current Agenda file)

Setup              Select printers, ports, fonts, and preview display driver
                   to use with Agenda

Named              Use a separate file of print settings (including Final,
                   Preview, and Layout settings)

SEE ALSO

About printing,   Use a menu,   » Index

Notes/Macro Editor: Print Named Command Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Retrieve           Retrieve a print settings (NPS) file whose settings you
                   want to use as the defaults for the current Agenda file

Save               Save the Layout, Preview, and Final print settings from the
                   current Agenda file to a print settings file

Erase              Delete a print settings file from disk

SEE ALSO

About printing,   Use a menu,   » Index

Category Manager: Main Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Category           Add, modify, discard categories in current Agenda file

Print              Print category hierarchy or info about current Agenda file

Return             Return to current view (F9)

Quit               End Agenda session and exit to operating system (ALT-Q)

SEE ALSO

About category manager,   About categories,   Use a menu,   » Index

Category Manager: Print Command Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Final              Print category hierarchy or Agenda file info to printer or
                   file

Preview            Display output on screen to see how it will look when
                   printed

Layout             Define page layout for printed category manager info (any
                   layout changes you make apply only to current Agenda file)

Setup              Select printers, ports, fonts, and preview display driver
                   to use with Agenda

Named              Use a separate file of print settings (including Final,
                   Preview, and Layout settings)

SEE ALSO

About printing,   Use a menu,   » Index

Category Manager: Print Named Command Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Retrieve           Retrieve a print settings (NPS) file whose settings you
                   want to use as the defaults for the current Agenda file

Save               Save the Layout, Preview, and Final print settings from the
                   current Agenda file to a print settings file

Erase              Delete a print settings file from disk

SEE ALSO

About printing,   Use a menu,   » Index

Agenda Key and Menu Charts

  +----+                               |  +------------+
  |VIEW|                               |  |MACRO EDITOR|
  +----+                               |  +------------+
   Accelerator Keys                    |   Accelerator Keys
   Function Keys                       |   Function Keys
   Movement and Special Keys           |   Movement and Special Keys
   Menu Commands                       |   Menu Commands
  +----+                               |  +-----+
  |NOTE|                               |  |OTHER|
  +----+                               |  +-----+
   Accelerator Keys                    |   Auto Completion (Search) Keys
   Function Keys                       |   Calendar Keys
   Movement and Special Keys           |   Category List Manipulation Keys
   Menu Commands                       |   Date Browse Keys
  +----------------+                   |   Dialog Box Keys
  |CATEGORY MANAGER|                   |   Edit Mode Keys
  +----------------+                   |   File Selection Keys
   Accelerator Keys                    |   Help Keys
   Function Keys                       |   Macro Manager Keys
   Movement and Special Keys           |   Print Preview Keys
   Menu Commands                       |   View Manager Keys

Views: Accelerator Keys

ALT-A.....Set an alarm on the current  |ALT-M.....Make assignment of current
          item                         |          or marked items to category
ALT-B.....Browse current view by date  |ALT-N/P...Display next/previous view
          (requires a date filter)     |ALT-O.....Make current item dependent
ALT-C.....Display calendar             |          on marked item(s)
ALT-D/U...Insert section below/above   |ALT-Q.....Quit Agenda
          current section (down/up)    |ALT-S.....Sort items according to
ALT-E.....Execute conditions/actions   |          current sort settings
          of current category          |ALT-V.....Display/hide empty sections
ALT-F.....Close current file and open  |          (that have no items)
          previous file                |ALT-W.....Save (write) current file
ALT-G.....Retrieve (get) a file        |ALT-X.....Execute all conditions and
ALT-H.....Hop to next occurrence of    |          actions in current file
          item in current or next view |ALT-Y.....Insert (yank back) last
ALT-I.....Insert new item              |          removed item into current
ALT-J.....Jump to next marked item in  |          section
          current view                 |ALT-Z.....Run current macro
ALT-K.....Display/hide function key map|ALT-+/-...Expand/collapse current
ALT-L/R...Insert column to left/right  |          section to display/hide
          of current position          |          items

Notes: Accelerator Keys

ALT-C.....Display calendar             |ALT-W.....Delete next word
                                       |
ALT-D/T...Insert current date/time into|ALT-Z.....Run current macro
          note text at cursor          |
                                       |
ALT-K.....Display/hide function key map|
                                       |
ALT-M.....Insert hard carriage return  |
          (new line) at cursor         |
                                       |
ALT-N/P...Go to note for next/previous |
          item or category             |
                                       |
ALT-Q.....Quit Agenda                  |
                                       |
ALT-S.....Repeat search using criteria |
          specified with ALT-F6        |
          (SEARCH)                     |

Category Manager: Accelerator Keys

ALT-A.....Set actions (assignment, date|ALT-Q.....Quit Agenda
          or numeric) for this category|
                                       |ALT-R.....Insert category right (as a
ALT-C.....Display calendar             |          child of current category)
                                       |
ALT-D/U...Insert sibling category      |ALT-Z.....Run current macro
          below/above current category |
          (down/up)                    |ALT-+/-...Expand/collapse current
                                       |          category to display/hide
ALT-I.....Insert sibling category below|          children
          highlight (same as ALT-D)    |
                                       |
ALT-K.....Display/hide function key map|
                                       |
ALT-L.....Insert category left (as an  |
          uncle of current category)   |
                                       |
ALT-P.....Set conditions (assignment,  |
          date or numeric) for this    |
          category                     |

Macro Editor: Accelerator Keys

ALT-C.....Display calendar             |ALT-S.....Repeat search using criteria
                                       |          specified with ALT-F6
ALT-D/T...Insert current date/time into|          (SEARCH)
          macro at cursor              |
                                       |ALT-W.....Delete next word
ALT-K.....Display/hide function key map|
                                       |
ALT-M.....Insert hard carriage return  |
          (new line) at cursor         |
                                       |
ALT-Q.....Quit Agenda                  |

Views: Function Keys

F1 HELP........Display Agenda Help info|ALT-F1 COMPOSE...Type international
F2 EDIT........Edit current item or    |                 or special characters
               category name           |ALT-F2 WHEN......Set When date for
F3 CHOICES.....Change assignments for  |                 current or marked
               item or choose category |                 item(s)
               for section/column head,|ALT-F3 MACRO.....Run or create macros
               or column entry         |ALT-F4 DISCARD...Delete current item
F4 DONE........Designate current or    |                 or category from file
               marked item(s) as done  |ALT-F5 GO TO.....Move quickly to
F5 NOTE........Display note for current|                 another section
               item or category        |ALT-F6 SEARCH....Search items/notes
F6 PROPS.......Modify properties of    |                 for particular text
               item, section/column    |ALT-F7 UNMKALL...Unmark all marked
               head, or column entry   |                 items in view
F7 MARK........Mark one or more items  |ALT-F8 LAST VW...Return to previously
               to modify as a group    |                 used view
F8 VW MGR......Use view manager        |ALT-F9 COPY......Copy item(s) to
F9 CAT MGR.....Use category manager    |                 another section
F10 MENU.......Use view command menu   |ALT-F10 MOVE.....Move current item,
                                       |                 column, or section

Notes: Function Keys

F1 HELP........Display Agenda Help info|ALT-F1 COMPOSE...Type international
F2 PASTE.......Paste text you've cut or|                 or special characters
               copied                  |ALT-F2 MAKECAT...Make text into new
F3 COPY........Copy text so you can    |                 category (without
               paste it elsewhere      |                 removing it from the
F4 CUT.........Remove text so you can  |                 note)
               paste it elsewhere      |ALT-F3 MACRO.....Run or create macros
F5 RETURN......Save changes to note and|ALT-F4 DELETE....Remove text from the
               return to view or       |                 note
               category manager        |ALT-F6 SEARCH....Search the note for
F6 MARKER......Specify attributes for a|                 particular text
               region of text          |ALT-F7 MAKEITM...Make text into new
F7 MARK........Mark a region of text   |                 item (and remove it
               you want to work with   |                 from the note)
F10 MENU.......Use note command menu   |ALT-F8 GETITMS...Copy marked items
                                       |                 and their notes into
                                       |                 current note
                                       |ALT-F9 APPEND....Move text to end of
                                       |                 current item or
                                       |                 category name

Category Manager: Function Keys

F1 HELP........Display Agenda Help info|ALT-F1 COMPOSE...Type international
F2 EDIT........Edit current category   |                 or special characters
               name                    |ALT-F3 MACRO.....Run or create macros
F5 NOTE........Display note for current|ALT-F4 DISCARD...Delete current
               category                |                 category from file
F6 PROPS.......Modify properties of    |ALT-F5 SORT......Arrange children of
               current category        |                 current category in
F7 PRM ().....Promote current category|                 alphabetical order
               up one level in the     |ALT-F6 SEARCH....Search hierarchy for
               hierarchy               |                 a category name
F8 DEM ().....Demote current category |ALT-F7 SHOWC/A...Turn on/off display
               down one level in the   |                 of conditions and
               hierarchy               |                 actions in hierarchy
F9 TO VIEW.....Return to current view  |ALT-F8 CLR C/A...Clear conditions or
F10 MENU.......Use category manager    |                 actions from category
               command menu            |ALT-F9 CPY C/A...Copy conditions or
                                       |                 actions from one
                                       |                 category to another
                                       |ALT-F10 MOVE.....Reposition current
                                       |                 category in hierarchy

Macro Editor: Function Keys

F1 HELP........Display Agenda Help info|ALT-F1 COMPOSE...Type international
F2 PASTE.......Paste text you've cut or|                 or special characters
               copied                  |ALT-F4 DELETE....Remove text from the
F3 COPY........Copy text so you can    |                 macro
               paste it elsewhere      |ALT-F6 SEARCH....Search the macro for
F4 CUT.........Remove text so you can  |                 particular text
               paste it elsewhere      |
F5 RETURN......Save changes to macro   |
               and return to view, note|
               or category manager     |
F7 MARK........Mark a region of text   |
               you want to work with   |
F10 MENU.......Use macro editor command|
               menu                    |

Views: Movement and Special Keys

...........Up one item or category    |INS.........Add an item (if highlight
            (same as BACKSPACE)        |            on item or head) or assign
...........Down one item or category  |            category, date, or number
            (same as ENTER)            |            to item (if highlight on
...........Left one column (same as   |            column entry)
            SHIFT-TAB)                 |DEL.........Remove item from section,
...........Right one column (same as  |            unassign current column
            TAB)                       |            entry, or remove current
PGUP........Up one screen              |            section/column (if
PGDN........Down one screen            |            highlight on head)
CTRL-PGUP...Up one section             |ENTER.......Complete the item or
CTRL-PGDN...Down one section           |            category you are editing
CTRL-......To far-left column         |            (press ENTER again to move
CTRL-......To far-right column        |            to next item or category)
HOME........To section/column head     |ESC.........Back out of current
END.........To last item or column     |            operation
            entry in section           |
CTRL-HOME...To first section head or   |
            column head in view        |
CTRL-END....To last item or column     |
            entry in view              |

Notes: Movement and Special Keys

...........Up one line                |INS.........Switch between Insert and
...........Down one line              |            Overwrite modes
...........Left one character         |DEL.........Delete character at cursor
...........Right one character        |BACKSPACE...Delete character to left
PGUP........Up one screen              |            of cursor
PGDN........Down one screen            |CTRL-
CTRL-......Left one word              |BACKSPACE...Delete word to left of
CTRL-......Right one word             |            cursor
HOME........To beginning of line       |ENTER.......Insert new line (hard
END.........To end of line             |            carriage return) at cursor
CTRL-HOME...To beginning of note       |CTRL-
CTRL-END....To end of note             |ENTER.......Delete from cursor to end
                                       |            of line
                                       |ESC.........Back out of current
                                       |            operation

Category Manager: Movement and Special Keys

...........Up one category (same as   |INS.........Add a category to current
            BACKSPACE)                 |            family
...........Down one category (same as |DEL.........Discard current category
            ENTER)                     |            from file
PGUP........Up one screen              |ENTER.......Complete the category you
PGDN........Down one screen            |            are editing (press ENTER
CTRL-PGUP...To previous sibling        |            again to move to next
CTRL-PGDN...To next sibling            |            category)
HOME........To parent of current family|ESC.........Back out of current
END.........To last child of current   |            operation
            family                     |
CTRL-HOME...To first category in       |
            hierarchy (MAIN)           |
CTRL-END....To last category in        |
            hierarchy                  |

Macro Editor: Movement and Special Keys

...........Up one line                |INS.........Switch between Insert and
...........Down one line              |            Overwrite modes
...........Left one character         |DEL.........Delete character at cursor
...........Right one character        |BACKSPACE...Delete character to left
PGUP........Up one screen              |            of cursor
PGDN........Down one screen            |CTRL-
CTRL-......Left one word              |BACKSPACE...Delete word to left of
CTRL-......Right one word             |            cursor
HOME........To beginning of line       |ENTER.......Insert new line (hard
END.........To end of line             |            carriage return) at cursor
CTRL-HOME...To beginning of macro      |CTRL-
CTRL-END....To end of macro            |ENTER.......Delete from cursor to end
                                       |            of line
                                       |ESC.........Back out of current
                                       |            operation

Save File Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Save to file       1 to 8 character name of Agenda file to save.  Specify a
                   path if you want to save file in a directory other than
                   current one.  Don't specify a file extension in file name.
                   (Agenda adds extension .AG when storing file in DOS.)  The
                   file you save becomes the current Agenda file.

                   For example, to save the Agenda file named SAMPLE on the
                   C drive in the INFO directory, type:

                     c:\info\sample

Also save backup   Yes.......Save backup copy of the Agenda file.  Backup is
                             stored in same directory as original and has same
                             name except for extension (.BG).

                   No........Don't save backup.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a file,   About saving,   » Index

Abandon Current Changes Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Revert to last     Yes.......Throw away all changes made to current Agenda
saved version                file since you last saved it and display contents
                             as they were.  If you have not saved during this
                             session, file reverts to the way it was when you
                             began the session.

                             Caution:  You can't recover your changes to the
                             file once you abandon them.

                   No........Cancel the Abandon command.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   About abandoning,   Save a file,   » Index

File Properties Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
File description   (Optional) 1 to 40 characters of text that describes this
                   Agenda file.

Set file password  (Optional) Displays the Enter Password box to set or change
                   password for this Agenda file.

Make backup on     Yes.............Whenever you retrieve this Agenda file,
open                               save contents to backup file.  Backup is
                                   stored in same directory as original and
                                   has same name except for extension (.BG).
                   No..............Don't make backup when retrieving.

Get                How you get a reservation for this file:
reservation        Automatically...Try to get a reservation for file whenever
                                   retrieving it (so you can update the file).
                   Manually........No automatic reservation. You must use File
                                   Maintenance Reservation command to get one.

Auto-import file   (Optional) 1 to 8 character name of structured text (STF)
                   file to be imported automatically whenever you retrieve
                   this Agenda file.  Specify a path if STF file is not in
                   current directory.  Agenda assumes file has .STF extension
                   (if other extension, specify it).  For example, to specify
                   file named SAMPLE with extension XYZ that is stored on C
                   drive in the INFO directory, type:

                     c:\info\sample.xyz

Insert new         Where to insert new columns in this Agenda file's views:
columns in         All sections........Insert new columns in all sections of
                                       current view.
                   Current section.....Insert new columns in only the current
                                       section of the current view.
                   You can override this setting for a particular column when
                   you use View Column Add command.

Empty trash        When to clear discarded items from this Agenda file (making
                   them unrecoverable):
                   On demand................Only when you use Utilities Trash
                                            command.
                   When file is closed......Whenever you close this file,
                                            leave Agenda, or use Utilities
                                            Trash command.
                   End of day...............Whenever system date changes or
                                            you use Utilities Trash command.
                   When item is discarded...As soon as items are discarded (do
                                            not keep items in trash at all).

Tab size           Number of spaces (0 to 40) that the cursor jumps when you
                   press TAB in a note or the macro editor.

Global date        Displays the Global Date Settings box to control date and
settings           time processing for this Agenda file.

Auto-assign        Displays the Auto-Assign Global Settings box to control
settings           how automatic assignments (conditions and actions) work in
                   this Agenda file.

Global             Displays the Global Protection Settings box to control
protection         how views, categories, and protection settings in this
                   Agenda file are protected from users.

File statistics    Displays the File Statistics box to show info about the
                   contents of this Agenda file.

Update defaults    Displays the Update Defaults box to make the File
                   Properties settings and Print settings of this Agenda
                   file the default settings for all new Agenda files you
                   create.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a file,   » Index

Enter Password Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Password           1 to 12 character password for this Agenda file that
                   protects it from unauthorized use.  For security, the
                   password doesn't appear when you type it.

                   There are 2 different kinds of passwords in Agenda:

                    Retrieval password:  Agenda prompts for this whenever you
                     try to retrieve the file.  You can define this password
                     when creating a new file or by using the File Properties
                     command (Set File Password).

                    Seal/Unseal password:  Agenda prompts for this when
                     you try to unseal a sealed file.  (You must unseal the
                     file to change any of its protection settings).  To
                     seal/unseal the file, use the File Properties command
                     (Global Protection).

SEE ALSO

File properties,   Fill in a box,   » Index

Global Date Settings Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Display format     Displays the Display Format box to control the format in
                   which dates and times appear in Agenda.

Input format       Displays the Input Format box to control the format you use
                   to enter dates and times in Agenda.

Morning,           Specific time of day Agenda is to display in a date column
Afternoon,         when interpreting the word "morning," "afternoon," or
Evening            "evening."  For example, when you type "morning" in an item
                   or when entering a date, Agenda translates this word into
                   the time specified in Morning setting (such as 9:15am).

                   To change the time in each setting: press SPACEBAR to
                   switch between hour and minute, press GREY + (on numeric
                   keypad) to increase hour/minute, press GREY - to decrease.
                   Or simply type the entire time yourself (example: 6:30pm).

Beginning/End      Day on which the week begins/ends (choices: Sun through
of week            Sat).  For example, you might specify that week begins on
                   Sun and ends on Sat or begins on Mon and ends on Fri.

First quarter      Month (Jan through Dec) and day (1 through 31) on which the
                   first quarter begins (example: Jun 1).

Beginning/End      Month and day on which the year begins/ends (example: you
of year            might use a fiscal year that begins Apr 1 and ends Mar 31).

Month alone        Day of the month Agenda is to display in a date column
means              if you type just the name of a month (for example, if you
                   type "this May" in an item or when entering a date):
                   First day.....The first day of that month (example: May 1).
                   Last day......The last day of that month (example: May 31).
                   Nth day.......You type day number to use in Day # setting
                                 (that appears only if you choose Nth day).

Day #              (Only if Month Alone Means set to Nth day) Number for the
                   day of the month (from 1 to 31).  This number applies to
                   every month of the year.

Process done       What Agenda is to do with items marked as done (!!):
items
                   No action..............No special processing on done items.

                   Discard................Place done items in trash. (You must
                                          also fill in When setting.)

                   Export to done file....Discard done items from this Agenda
                                          file and save them in a structured
                                          text file.  (You must also fill in
                                          When and Done File settings.)

When               (Only if Process Done Items set to Discard or Export) When
                   Agenda is to discard or export done items:
                   Immediately............As soon as you mark item done or
                                          system date matches Done date.
                   When file is closed....If you quit, open different file, or
                                          use commands Print, System, Launch.
                   End of day.............When system date exceeds Done date.

Done file          1 to 8 character name of a structured text (STF) file to
                   which done items are to be exported.  Specify a path if STF
                   file is not in current directory.  Agenda assumes file has
                   .STF extension (if file has other extension, specify it).

                   For example, to specify file named SAMPLE with extension
                   XYZ that is stored on C drive in the INFO directory, type:

                     c:\info\sample.xyz

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a file,   » Index

Display Format Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Display date       Whether date columns should display date, time, or both:
and/or time        Date only...11/30/90           Time Date...12:15pm 11/30/90
                   Date Time...11/30/90 12:15pm   Time only...12:15pm

Show day of week   Yes.........Mon 11/30/90       No..........11/30/90

Date format        How date columns should display dates:
                   MMDDYY......11/30/90           MMMDDYYYY...Nov/30/1990
                   MMDDYYYY....11/30/1990         DDMMM.......30/Nov
                   DDMMYY......30/11/90           DDMMMYY.....30/Nov/90
                   DDMMYYYY....30/11/1990         DDMMMYYYY...30/Nov/1990
                   YYMMDD......90/11/30           <Day>#......334
                   YYYYMMDD....1990/11/30         Day#........Day 334
                   YYDDMM......90/30/11           <Week>#.....47
                   YYYYDDMM....1990/30/11         Week#.......Week 47
                   MMMDD.......Nov/30             Relative....next Fri
                   MMMDDYY.....Nov/30/90          Relative#...7 days

Date separator     Punctuation mark to display between elements in a date:
                   Slash(/)....11/30/90           Comma(,)....11,30,90
                   Hyphen(-)...11-30-90           Space( )....11 30 90
                   Period(.)...11.30.90           Colon(:)....11:30:90

Clock              Which format date columns should use to display time:
                   24 hr.......13:30              12 hr.......1:30pm

Show am/pm         (Only if Clock set to 12 hr)
                   Yes.........1:30pm             No..........1:30

Time separator     Characters to display between elements in a time:
                   Colon(:)....1:30               hm..........1h30m

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Input Format Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Number order       Order in which you type the elements in a date:
                   MDY.........If you type 11/12/90, it means Nov 12, 1990.
                   MYD.........If you type 11/90/12,          "
                   DMY.........If you type 12/11/90,          "
                   DYM.........If you type 12/90/11,          "
                   YDM.........If you type 90/12/11,          "
                   YMD.........If you type 90/11/12,          "

Input date         Punctuation mark you use when typing dates:
separator          Slash(/)....11/30/90           Comma(,)....11,30,90
                   Hyphen(-)...11-30-90           Colon(:)....11:30:90
                   Period(.)...11.30.90

Input clock        Which format you use when typing times:
                   24 hr.......If you type 15:00, it means 3:00 in afternoon.
                   12 hr.......If you type 3:00pm,           "

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Enter dates & times,   » Index

Auto-Assign Global Settings Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Text matching      On.............Enable text conditions in the file (assign
                                  items to categories based on text matching
                                  between them).  You can control text
                                  conditions for specific categories with the
                                  Category Properties command.
                   Off............Disable text conditions for the entire file.

Match on           (Only if Text Matching set to On)  What text to search
                   when trying to match items to categories:
                   Item text......Search only text of items to seek matches.
                                  If an item's text contains a match for a
                                  category's text (name or text conditions),
                                  Agenda assigns the item to the category.
                   Note text......Search each item's note (but not the item
                                  text itself).
                   Both item
                   & note.........Search each item and its note.

Required match     (Only if Text Matching set to On)  How strong the text
strength           match must be for an item to be assigned to a category:
                   Exact (100%).....All words in the category's name (or text
                                    conditions) must appear in item. (Matching
                                    is not case-sensitive.)
                   Partial (50%)....At least half of the words.
                   Minimal (2%).....At least one of the words.

Confirm            (Only if Text Matching set to On) In which instances Agenda
assignments        is to ask for your confirmation before making assignments
                   based on text matches:
                   Always...........For all text matches.
                   Sometimes........Only for partial or minimal text matches.
                   Never............Make all assignments without confirmation.

                   ? appears in control panel if there are assignments to
                   confirm.  Use Utilities Questions command to confirm them.

Ignore text        (Only if Text Matching set to On)  Characters you use to
enclosed by        enclose item/note text that Agenda should skip over when
                   searching for matches:
                   " "......"Ignore this text"     / /....../Ignore this text/
                   < >......<Ignore this text>     # #......#Ignore this text#
                   ' '......'Ignore this text'     [ ]......[Ignore this text]
                   ( )......(Ignore this text)     { }......{Ignore this text}

Ignore suffixes    (Only if Text Matching set to On)
                   Yes......Words match if they are same except for suffixes
                            (s, es, d, ed, er, est, ing, ful, wise, able,
                            ible, ly, ally, ment, al, ies, ier, ied, iful,
                            ily, y).  To control suffix matching for specific
                            categories, use Category Properties command. Note:
                            Suffixes never ignored for words under 4 letters.
                   No.......Words must have same suffixes in order to match.
                            Note: Possessive endings ('s) are always ignored.

Ignore accents     (Only if Text Matching set to On)
                   Yes......Words match if they are same except for accents.
                   No.......Words must have same accents in order to match.

Assignment         On.......Enable the file's assignment, date, and numeric
conditions                  conditions.  You can control these conditions for
                            specific categories with the Category Properties
                            command.
                   Off......Disable all of the assignment, date, and numeric
                            conditions in the file.

Assignment         On.......Enable the file's assignment, date, and numeric
actions                     actions.  You can control these actions for
                            specific categories with the Category Properties
                            command.
                   Off......Disable all of the assignment, date, and numeric
                            actions in the file.

Apply conditions   When Agenda should apply the text, assignment, date, and
                   numeric conditions in the file:

                   Automatically......Whenever you enter or edit an item.
                   On demand (O)......Only when you explicitly request it by
                                      using Utilities Execute command, ALT-E,
                                      or ALT-X.  Useful for large files.
                   Never (N)..........Don't apply any conditions in file.

If an assignment   What to do when conditions in the file make new item
conflicts with     assignments that conflict with existing assignments (such
another            as assigning an item to 2 mutually exclusive categories):

                   Keep the old.......Ignore the new assignment made by the
                                      condition and retain the old assignment.
                   Override the old...Break the existing assignment and use
                                      the new one made by the condition.

Relationship of    For every category in the file, how Agenda is to combine
text and           the category's text conditions with the other conditions
assignment         (assignment, date, and numeric) it has:
conditions
                   OR (|).......An item need only meet one of the category's
                                text conditions OR one of the category's other
                                conditions in order to be assigned to the
                                category.

                   AND (&)......An item must meet one of the category's text
                                conditions AND all of the category's other
                                conditions in order to be assigned to the
                                category.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Category properties,   » Index

Global Protection Settings Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Default view       How all views in this file are protected from modification:
protection
                   No protection.....User can modify views in any way.
                   Append only.......Let user add new sections/columns, but
                                     don't allow modification of existing
                                     sections/columns, changing of view
                                     properties, or deletion of views.
                   Full protection...Don't let user add sections/columns,
                                     modify sections/columns, change view
                                     properties, or delete views.

                   You can override default view protection for a specific
                   view with the View Properties command.

User can add       Yes...............Let user create new views in this file.
new views          No................Prevent user from adding any new views to
                                     this file.

Default category   Yes....Prevent user from discarding categories or changing
protection                their properties.
                   No.....Let user discard/change categories.
                   You can override default category protection for a specific
                   category with the Category Properties command.

Default category   Yes....Let user add new categories as immediate children of
can have new              an existing category.
children           No.....Prevent user from adding child categories.
                   You can override this setting for a specific category with
                   the Category Properties command.

Seal/Unseal the    Press SPACEBAR to switch between sealed and unsealed.  Seal
file               the file if you want to prevent users from changing ANY of
                   the protection settings in the file.  Agenda prompts you
                   for a password that users must specify in order to unseal
                   the file again.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

File Statistics Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Unused space       Shows percentage of the file's allocated space not in use.
                   If above 25%, recover unused space with File Maintenance
                   Compress command.  For large files, compress even sooner.

Items              Shows total number of items in this Agenda file.

Items in trash     Shows number of discarded items stored in trash. (To
                   recover them use Item Undisc command.  To clear them use
                   Utilities Trash command.)

Items with notes   Shows number of items in this Agenda file that have notes.

Categories         Shows total number of categories in this Agenda file.

Avg items/cat      Shows average number of items assigned to a category in
                   this Agenda file.
Avg cats/item      Shows average number of categories that an item is assigned
                   to in this Agenda file.

Update Defaults Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Update new file    Yes.......Use the File Properties settings and the Print
properties?                  settings you've specified for the current Agenda
                             file as the default settings for all new Agenda
                             files you create.

                   No........Cancel the Update Defaults operation.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Import Structured File Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Import from        1 to 8 character name of structured text (STF) file to
file               import info from (default is TRANSFER.STF).  Specify a path
                   if file isn't in current directory. Agenda assumes file has
                   .STF extension (if other, specify it).

                   For example, to specify file named SAMPLE with extension
                   XYZ that is stored on C drive in the INFO directory, type:

                     c:\info\sample.xyz

Assign to          New or existing category that items from the STF file are
category           imported to in the Agenda file.  Default is current section
                   head.  All imported items are automatically assigned to the
                   category you specify.

Import items       Yes....Import all items from STF file to the Agenda file.
                   No.....Don't import any items.

Import             (Only if Import Items set to Yes)
assignments        Yes....Import all assignments (of items to categories) from
                          STF file to the Agenda file.  If a given category
                          already exists in the Agenda file, any new item
                          assignments from STF file are added to the category.

                   No.....Don't import any assignments.

Import             Yes....Import all explicitly-created categories (as opposed
categories                to categories used only in assignments) from STF
                          file to Agenda file. These are categories previously
                          exported from an Agenda file to the STF file.

                   No.....Don't import any explicitly-created categories.

Import new         Yes.............Import only info that is new in STF file
data only                          since last import. (Don't edit Import From
                                   File setting between imports. Don't modify
                                   STF file except to append new info.)
                   No..............Import all info from the file.

Categories         How Agenda decides if a category in STF file matches a
match if           category in Agenda file (when match occurs, the imported
                   category's items are assigned to the existing category):

                   Category names
                   match...........Category name in STF file is the same as
                                   category name in Agenda file.
                   Category name
                   matches any
                   expression......Category name in STF file is the same as
                                   category text (name or text conditions) in
                                   Agenda file.

Create unmatched   (Only if Import Items and Import Assignments set to Yes)
categories         Yes....If a category is assigned to item(s) in STF file but
used in                   doesn't match an existing category (as determined by
assignments               Categories Match If setting), add it to Agenda file.

                   No.....Don't import non-matching categories specified only
                          in assignments. Items assigned to such categories in
                          STF file won't be imported into Agenda file.

Create unmatched   (Only if Import Categories set to Yes)
categories         Yes....If a category is used in conditions/actions in STF
used in                   file but doesn't match an existing category (see
conditions and            Categories Match If setting), add it to Agenda file.
actions
                   No.....Don't import non-matching categories specified only
                          in conditions/actions.

Strip carriage     Yes....Remove single carriage returns from imported notes
returns                   (wrap text to line length of 79). Keep strings of 2
                          or more carriage returns.

                   No.....Don't strip carriage returns (keep original text
                          formatting, except wrap any lines longer than 79).

Delete             Yes....Delete the STF file from disk after import.
structured file
after importing    No.....Don't delete it.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a category,   Select a file,   » Index

Export Structured File Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Export to file     1 to 8 character name of structured text (STF) file to
                   export info into (default is TRANSFER.STF).  Specify a path
                   if file isn't in current directory. Agenda assumes file has
                   .STF extension (if file has other extension, specify it).
                   Example of path and extension:  c:\info\sample.xyz

File already       Replace............Replace entire contents of STF file.
exists             Append.............Keep current contents of STF file and
                                      just add the newly exported info.

Export items       Which items from Agenda file to export to STF file:
                   None...............No items or their notes.
                   Current item.......The current item and its note.
                   Marked items.......All marked items (t) and their notes.
                   Items in section...All items in section and their notes.
                   Items in view......All items in view and their notes.
                   All items..........All items in file and their notes.

Export             (Not used if Export Items set to None)  How assignments
assignments        are to be exported from Agenda file to STF file:

                   Do not export
                   assignments..............Don't record any assignment info
                                            in the STF file.
                   Export explicit
                   assignments only.........Export only assignments that were
                                            made explicitly by you or by
                                            assignment actions.
                   Export all assignments
                   as explicit..............Export all assignments to STF file
                                            and record them all as explicit,
                                            even the conditional ones.

Export             Yes......Export the category specified in the Export
categories                  Category and Children Of setting (below) as well
                            as its descendents.  Category structure and
                            properties are included in the export.

                   No.......Don't export categories except those with items
                            assigned (properties of these categories are not
                            exported).

Export category    (Only if Export Categories set to Yes)  Name of existing
and children of    category that heads the family you want to export.  Default
                   is MAIN (which exports all categories, structure, and
                   category properties from the Agenda file).

Record categories  (Not used if Export Items or Export Assignments set to
referenced in      none)  When exporting categories specified in assignments,
assignments using  how to record them in STF file:

                   Category name only....Export category but not its ancestry
                                         info (parents, grandparents, etc.).
                   Complete ancestry.....Export category along with its full
                                         ancestry.

Record categories  (Not used if Export Categories set to No)  When exporting
referenced in      categories specified in conditions/actions, how to record
conditions and     them in STF file:
actions using
                   Category name only....Export category but not its ancestry
                                         info (parents, grandparents, etc.).
                   Complete ancestry.....Export category along with its full
                                         ancestry.

Discard items      (Not used if Export Items set to None)

                   Yes....Once an item is exported, discard it from the Agenda
                          file (put it in the trash).

                   No.....Don't discard items after they're exported.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a category,   Select a file,   » Index

Replace Existing File Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Replace the        Yes.......Completely replace the current contents of the
existing file                target Agenda file (which already exists on disk)
                             with your new information.

                             Caution:  You can't recover the file's current
                             contents once you replace them.

                   No........Cancel the command and leave the target Agenda
                             file unchanged.  Agenda returns you to the Select
                             File box where you can either select a different
                             existing file to use as the target or type the
                             name of a new file.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Erase File Confirmation Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Delete             Yes.......Erase the specified Agenda file from disk.
(filename)?
                             Caution:  Once you erase an Agenda file, you
                             can't recover it.

                   No........Cancel the Erase command and leave the specified
                             Agenda file unchanged.  Agenda returns you to the
                             Select File box where you can select a different
                             file to erase (if appropriate).

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Get/Release Reservation Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Ok to get the      (Only if the file doesn't currently have a reservation)
reservation?       Yes....Try to get the reservation for the current Agenda
                          file.  While you have a reservation for this file,
                          you can read it and update it.  Other network users
                          can't update the file, but they can read it.
                   No.....Cancel the Get Reservation request.  You can read
                          the file but not update it.

Ok to release      (Only if the file currently has a reservation)
the reservation?   Yes....Release the reservation for the current Agenda
                          file.  Once you release the file's reservation,
                          you can read it but not update it.  (This also
                          allows another user to get a reservation for this
                          file.)
                   No.....Cancel the Release Reservation request.  This means
                          you can still read and update the file.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Item Properties Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Item text          1 to 350 characters of item text.  If you want, you can
                   edit the existing text that appears in this setting.

Note               Displays the item's note so you can read or edit it.  If
                   the item already has note text, the Note setting displays
                   the first few words of it.

Note file          (Optional) 1 to 8 character name of a separate text file to
                   attach as the source of this item's note.  If file has an
                   extension, specify it.  Specify a path if the file isn't
                   in current directory (example of a path and extension:
                   c:\info\sample.txt).  When you display the item's note,
                   Agenda retrieves the text from this file.  When you edit
                   the note, Agenda saves the changes to this file.

Item statistics    Displays the Item Statistics box to show info about the
                   current item.

Assigned to        List of 1 or more categories to which current item is
                   assigned.  To explicitly assign item to other categories,
                   add them to this list.  Enter existing category names or
                   new ones.  To break assignment of item to a category,
                   remove that category from this list (press DEL).

                   When assigning the item to a date, numeric, or unindexed
                   category, you can also specify a value (a date/time, a
                   number, or text) for the assignment.  You can press
                   F4 (VALUES) to change the value for highlighted category.

                   Example of an item assigned to the standard category Calls
                   and the date category When:

                     Assigned to:
                       Calls
                       When(11/05/90)

SEE ALSO

Use the assignment profile,   Fill in a box,   Select a file,   » Index

Item Statistics Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Categories         Shows total number of categories in the file to which
assigned to        the current item is assigned (both explicitly and
                   conditionally).

Items that depend  Shows total number of items in the file for which the
on this one        current item is a prerequisite.

Items that this    Shows total number of items in the file that are
one is dependent   prerequisites for the current item.
on

Discard Marked/Current Item(s) Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Discard            Which item(s) to discard from the Agenda file and put in
                   the trash:

                   Current item.....Discard only the item that is currently
                                    highlighted.

                   Marked items.....Discard all items in the Agenda file that
                                    you've marked (t) with F7 (MARK).

                   Tip:  In either case, you can recover the discarded items
                   later in the same Agenda session by using the Item Undisc
                   command.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Discard Current Item Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Discard this       Yes.......Discard the current item from the Agenda file and
item?                        put it in the trash.  Tip: You can recover
                             discarded items later in the same Agenda session
                             by using the Item Undisc command.

                   No........Cancel the Discard command and leave the current
                             item unchanged.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Turn off confirm mode,   » Index

Item Undiscard Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Undiscard          Which discarded items to recover from the trash:

                   Last item in trash.....Recover just the most recently
                                          discarded item and insert it in the
                                          current section below the highlight
                                          position.  All other discarded
                                          items in the trash remain there
                                          after this operation.

                   All items in trash.....Recover every discarded item from
                                          the trash and insert them in the
                                          current section below the highlight
                                          position.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Discard Unassigned Item Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Item has no other  Yes.......Proceed with the Break Assignment operation to
assignments.                 break the assignment between the current item and
Discard the item?            the current section head.  Because this item is
                             not assigned to any other categories, Agenda
                             discards it from the file (puts it in the trash).

                             Tip:  You can recover discarded items during the
                             same Agenda session by using the Item Undisc
                             command.

                   No........Cancel the Break Assignment operation and leave
                             the current item assigned to the current section
                             head.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Assign an item,   » Index

Break Assignment Confirmation Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Remove the item's  Yes.......Break the assignment between the highlighted
assignment to                category (used as a column entry) and the current
this category?               item (on the same line as that column entry).
                             Agenda removes this column entry from the view
                             but retains the category in the category
                             hierarchy and anywhere else it is used in views.

                   No........Cancel the operation and leave the current item
                             assigned to the highlighted category.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Turn off confirm mode,   Assign an item,   » Index

Remove Item from Section Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Remove this        Yes.......Break the assignment between the highlighted
item from the                item and the current section head (under which
section?                     the item appears).  This causes the item to be
                             removed from that section.  But the item is
                             still assigned to one or more other categories,
                             so it won't be discarded from the Agenda file.

                             Tip:  If you want to completely discard the item
                             from the file, use the Item Discard command or
                             ALT-F4 (DISCARD).

                   No........Cancel the operation and leave the highlighted
                             item assigned to the current section head.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Turn off confirm mode,   Assign an item,   » Index

Category Properties/Add Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Category name      1 to 69 character name for this category.  Once you specify
                   the name, you can edit it any time.

Parent is          (Only for Category Properties) Displays the parent category
                   of the current category. You can't change this setting.  To
                   place the current category under a different parent, go to
                   the category manager and press ALT-F10 (MOVE).

Make child         (Only for Category Add) New or existing category that is to
                   be the parent of the category you're adding.

Short name         (Optional -- appears only if Type is Standard)  1 to 69
                   character synonym for the category name.  Agenda displays
                   the short name in columns that are too narrow to display
                   the category name.

Type               What this category is to be used for:
                   Standard.....Organize items by assigning them to 1 or more
                                of the categories in a family (hierarchy).
                   Unindexed....Assign text values to items.  A text value can
                                contain letters or numbers (that you don't
                                want to use in calculations).
                   Numeric......Assign numeric values (to be used in
                                calculations) to items.
                   Date.........Assign date/time values to items.

                   If you make a category Unindexed, Numeric, or Date, you
                   can't change it to another type later.

Match category     (Only if Type set to Standard)
name               Yes.....Look for the category's name within item text and
                           assign all matching items to this category.
                   No......Don't match item text with category name.

Match short        (Only if Type set to Standard)
name               Yes.....Look for the category's short name within item text
                           and assign all matching items to this category.
                   No......Don't match item text with category short name.

Also match         (Optional -- appears only if Type is Standard)
                   One or more text conditions for this category (max of 69
                   characters).  Agenda searches for items that meet these
                   conditions and assigns those items to the category (this
                   gives you several ways to match items to the category, in
                   case they don't match category name or short name.)  Can
                   include punctuation and control characters: * ? ; , ~ ! \
                   ( ) ^ " " (example: Pat* matches Pat, Patty, or Patricia).

Note               Displays the category's note so you can read or edit it.
                   If the category already has note text, the Note setting
                   displays the first few words of it.

Note file          (Optional) 1 to 8 character name of a separate text file to
                   attach as the source of this category's note.  If file has
                   an extension, specify it.  Specify a path if file isn't in
                   the current directory (example of a path and extension:
                   c:\info\sample.txt).  When you display the category's
                   note, Agenda retrieves the text from this file.  When you
                   edit the note, Agenda saves the changes to this file.

Exclusive          (Only if Type set to Standard)
children           Yes.....Make all child categories of this parent category
                           mutually exclusive (so that an item can't be
                           assigned to more than one of these children at a
                           time).  Agenda displays brackets next to mutually
                           exclusive children in category hierarchy.
                   No......Allow this category to have children that aren't
                           mutually exclusive (so that items can be assigned
                           to more than one of them).

Special actions    How items are to be processed as soon as they're assigned
                   to this category or to one of its children:
                   No action...........Don't do anything special to the items.
                   Discard item........Put these items in the trash.
                   Designate as done...Give these items the current date as
                                       their Done date and mark them done (!!).
                   Export item.........Save the items in structured text file.
                                       (See: Discard Items & Export to File.)

Discard items      (Only if Special Actions set to Export Item)
                   Yes.................Put items in trash after export.
                   No..................Keep items in Agenda file after export.

Export to file     (Only if Special Actions set to Export Item)  1 to 8
                   character name of a structured text (STF) file to hold
                   exported items.  Specify path if STF file not in current
                   directory.  If file extension is other than .STF, specify.

Statistics         Displays the Category Statistics box to show info about the
                   current category.

Advanced           Displays the Advanced Category Settings box to control
settings           these characteristics of the current category: conditions,
                   actions, assignments, protection, and new children.

Assignment         (Only if Type is Standard)  Conditions under which items
conditions         are automatically assigned to current category.  Define
                   assignment conditions (using standard or unindexed
                   categories), date conditions (using date categories), or
                   numeric conditions (using numeric categories).

Assignment         Actions to perform automatically on items as they are
actions            assigned to the category.  Define assignment actions (using
                   standard or unindexed categories), date actions (using date
                   categories), or numeric actions (using numeric categories).

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a category,   Select a file,   » Index

Category Statistics Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Items in category  Shows number of items in the file currently assigned to
                   this category.

Child categories   Shows number of child categories in the file for which
                   this category is the parent.

Used as section    Shows number of sections in the file for which this
heads              category is used as the section head.

Included in view   Shows number of views in the file that use this category
filters            as a filter.

Included in        Shows number of conditions in the file that refer to this
conditions         category.

Included in        Shows number of actions in the file that refer to this
actions            category.

Assignment Condition Value Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Assign items       How this assignment condition is to test the specified
to (current        category to determine which items to conditionally assign
category) if       to the current category:
they are (choice)
to (specified      Assigned.......Assign items to the current category when
category)                         they are either conditionally or explicitly
                                  assigned (+) to the specified category.

                   Not assigned...Assign items to the current category when
                                  they are not assigned (-) to the specified
                                  category.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Assignment Action Value Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
When items are     What this assignment action is to do with items as they are
assigned to        assigned (either conditionally or explicitly) to the
(current           current category:
category) also
(choice) to/from   Assign
(specified         item to...........Explicitly assign (+) to the specified
category)                            category all items that are assigned to
                                     the current category.
                   Remove
                   assignment from...Remove (-) from the specified category
                                     all items that are assigned to the
                                     current category.  (In other words, break
                                     the assignments between these items and
                                     the specified category.)

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Numeric Condition Value Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Assign items       How this numeric condition is to test the specified numeric
to (current        category to determine which items to conditionally assign
category) if       to the current category:
they are (choice)
to (numeric        Assigned..........Assign items to the current category when
category)                            they're (conditionally or explicitly)
                                     assigned to specified numeric category.
                                     (You can optionally fill in Minimum and
                                     Maximum Value settings to specify a range
                                     of numbers that items must have in the
                                     numeric category in order to be assigned
                                     to the current category.)
                   Not assigned......Assign items to the current category when
                                     they're not assigned to the specified
                                     numeric category.
                   Clear condition...Remove this numeric condition from the
                                     current category.

Minimum/Maximum    (Optional -- appears only for Assigned)  Range of numbers
value              that items in the specified numeric category must have in
                   order to be assigned to the current category.  Examples:

                   The number 100 or greater       Numbers from 100 to 250
                     Minumum Value: 100              Minimum Value: 100
                     Maximum Value:                  Maximum Value: 250

                   The number 250 or less          The number 100 only
                     Minimum Value:                  Minumum Value: 100
                     Maximum Value: 250              Maximum Value: 100

Items should be    Inside range.....Items must have numbers that are included
                                    in the specified Minimum/Maximum Value
                                    range (as shown in examples above).
                   Outside range....Items must have numbers that are not
                                    included in the range.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Date Condition Value Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Assign items       How this date condition is to test the specified date
to (current        category to determine which items to conditionally assign
category) if       to the current category:
they are (choice)
to (date           Assigned..........Assign items to the current category when
category)                            they're (conditionally or explicitly)
                                     assigned to specified date category. (You
                                     can optionally fill in the Start and End
                                     Date settings to specify particular dates
                                     or times that items must have in the date
                                     category in order to be assigned to the
                                     current category.)
                   Not assigned......Assign items to the current category when
                                     they're not assigned to the specified
                                     date category.
                   Clear condition...Remove this date condition from the
                                     current category.

Start/End date     (Optional -- appears only for Assigned)  Range of dates or
                   times that items in specified date category must have in
                   order to be assigned to current category.  Type the dates
                   or press ALT-C (or F3) to select from calendar.  Examples:

                   On or after Nov 12, 1990        From today through tomorrow
                     Start Date: 11/12/90            Start Date: today
                     End Date:                       End Date:   tomorrow
                   At or before 3:00pm today       This coming Friday only
                     Start Date:                     Start Date: Fri
                     End Date:   today at 3:00pm     End Date:   Fri

Items should be    Inside range.....Items must have dates or times that are
                                    included in the specified Start/End Date
                                    range (as shown in examples above).
                   Outside range....Items must have dates or times that are
                                    not included in the range.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Enter dates & times,   » Index

Numeric Action Value Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
When items are     What this numeric action is to do with items as they are
assigned to        assigned (conditionally or explicitly) to current category:
(current
category) also     Assign item to....Explicitly assign to specified numeric
(choice) to/from                     category all items that are assigned to
(numeric                             the current category.
category)          Remove
                   assignment from...Remove from specified numeric category
                                     all items that are assigned to current
                                     category (break the assignments between
                                     these items and the numeric category).
                   Clear action to...Remove this numeric action from the
                                     current category.

With value         (Optional -- appears only for Assign Item To)  A number
                   that items are to be given when the numeric action assigns
                   them to the specified numeric category (example: 100).

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Date Action Value Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
When items are     What this date action is to do with items as they are
assigned to        assigned (conditionally or explicitly) to current category:
(current           Assign item to....Explicitly assign to specified date
category) also                       category all items that are assigned to
(choice) to/from                     the current category.
(date category)    Remove
                   assignment from...Remove from specified date category
                                     all items that are assigned to current
                                     category (break assignments between these
                                     items and the date category).
                   Clear action to...Remove this date action from category.

With date          (Optional -- appears only for Assign Item To)  A date or
                   time that items are given when the date action assigns
                   them to the specified date category. Type the date or press
                   ALT-C (or F3) to select from calendar.  Examples: 11/12/90,
                   Fri, today, today at 3:00pm, 2 weeks from today.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Enter dates & times,   » Index

Advanced Category Settings Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Text matching      On............Enable the category's text conditions (assign
                                 items whose text matches category's text).
                   Off...........Disable the category's text conditions.
                   Global........Use the file's default for this setting
                                 (specified with File Properties command).

Match on           (Only if Text Matching set to On)  What text to search
                   when trying to match items to this category:
                   Item text.....Search only text of items to seek matches.
                                 If an item's text contains a match for this
                                 category's text (name or text conditions),
                                 Agenda assigns the item to the category.
                   Note text.....Search each item's note (but not item text).
                   Both item &
                   note..........Search each item and its note.
                   Global........Use the file's default for this setting
                                 (specified with File Properties command).

Required match     (Only if Text Matching set to On)  How strong the text
strength           match must be for an item to be assigned to this category:
                   Exact - 100%....All words in category's text condition or
                                   name must be in item.  Not case-sensitive.
                   Partial - 50%...At least half of the words.
                   Minimal - 2%....At least one of the words.
                   Global..........Use the file's default for this setting
                                   (specified with File Properties command).

Confirm            (Only if Text Matching set to On)  When Agenda should ask
assignments        you to confirm assignments that are based on text matches:
                   Always - ?......For all text matches in this category.
                   Sometimes - ?...Only for partial or minimal text matches.
                   Never...........Make all assignments without confirmation.
                   Global..........Use default (from File Properties command).
                   ? appears in control panel if there are assignments to
                   confirm.  Use Utilities Questions command to confirm them.

Ignore suffixes    (Only if Text Matching set to On)
                   Yes......Words match if they are the same except for
                            suffixes (s, es, d, ed, er, est, ing, ful, wise,
                            able, ible, ly, ally, ment, al, ies, ier, ied,
                            iful, ily, y).  Note: Suffixes are never ignored
                            for words under 4 letters.
                   No.......Words must have same suffixes in order to match.
                            Note: Possessive endings ('s) are always ignored.
                   Global...Use the file's default for this setting
                            (specified with File Properties command).

Ignore accents     (Only if Text Matching set to On)
                   Yes......Words match if they are same except for accents.
                   No.......Words must have same accents in order to match.
                   Global...Use the file's default for this setting
                            (specified with File Properties command).

Assignment         On.......Enable the category's assignment, date, and
conditions                  numeric conditions.
                   Off......Disable the category's assignment, date, and
                            numeric conditions.
                   Global...Use the file's default for this setting
                            (specified with File Properties command).

Assignment         On.......Enable the category's assignment, date, and
actions                     numeric actions.
                   Off......Disable the category's assignment, date, and
                            numeric actions.
                   Global...Use the file's default for this setting
                            (specified with File Properties command).

Apply conditions   When Agenda should apply the text, assignment, date, and
                   numeric conditions of this category:
                   Automatically......Whenever you enter or edit an item.
                   On demand - O......Only when you explicitly request it by
                                      using Utilities Execute command, ALT-E,
                                      or ALT-X.  Useful for large files.
                   Never - N..........Don't apply the category's conditions.

If an assignment   What to do when this category's conditions make new item
conflicts with     assignments that conflict with existing assignments (such
another            as assigning an item to 2 mutually exclusive categories):
                   Keep the old - ±...Ignore the new assignment made by the
                                      condition and retain the old assignment.
                   Override the old...Break the existing assignment and use
                                      the new one made by the condition.
                   Global.............Use the file's default for this setting
                                      (made with File Properties command).

Allow explicit     Yes......Agenda allows items to be explicitly assigned to
assignments                 this category.  Explicit assignments are those you
                            make manually as well as those made automatically
                            by actions.
                   No - ...Don't allow explicit assignments to the category.
                            Items can be assigned to it only by conditions.
                            (You can specify more about explicit assignments
                            in the Make Items Fit setting below.)

Make items fit     (Only when Allow Explicit Assignments set to No)
the category       Yes......Agenda converts category's explicit assignments
settings                    to conditional assignments (by forcing the items
                            assigned to this category to fulfill the
                            conditions attached to the category).
                   No.......Don't allow any explicit assignments to this
                            category. Agenda simply ignores these assignments.

Relationship of    How Agenda is to combine the category's text conditions
text and           with the other conditions (assignment, date, and numeric)
assignment         it has:
conditions
                   OR - |.......An item need only meet one of the category's
                                text conditions OR one of the category's other
                                conditions in order to be assigned to the
                                category.

                   AND - &......An item must meet one of the category's text
                                conditions AND all of the category's other
                                conditions in order to be assigned to the
                                category.

                   Global.......Use the file's default for this setting
                                (specified with File Properties command).

Category is        Yes - ¶...Prevent user from discarding this category or
protected                    changing its properties.

                   No........Let user discard/change this category.

                   Global....Use the file's default for this setting
                             (specified with File Properties command).

Category can       Yes.......Let user add new categories as immediate children
have new                     of this category.
children
                   No - ....Prevent user from adding children to this
                             category.

                   Global....Use the file's default for this setting
                             (specified with File Properties command).

Assign item date   (Only for date categories) How and when Agenda is to assign
                   a date to items in this category:
                   Never..................Don't assign the date automatically.

                   When item is entered...Assign the system date when the item
                                          is entered.
                   When item text is
                   edited.................Assign the system date when the item
                                          is entered or whenever it is edited.
                   When note text is
                   edited.................Assign the system date when the
                                          item's note is entered or whenever
                                          it is edited.
                   When item or note
                   text is edited.........Assign the system date when the item
                                          or its note is entered, or whenever
                                          the item or its note is edited.

Assign item date   When item is
                   assigned...............Assign the system date when the
                                          item is entered or whenever it is
                                          assigned to another category.
                   When item is
                   assigned or edited.....Assign the system date when the item
                                          is entered, or whenever it is edited
                                          or assigned to another category.

                   From the item text.....Assign the date from the text of the
                                          item.  (See the Which One setting.)

                   From the note text.....Assign date from text of the item's
                                          note.  (See the Which One setting.)
                   From the item or
                   note text..............Assign date from text of item or its
                                          note.  (See the Which One setting.)

Which one          (Only for date categories that assign the item date from
                   item text, note text, or both)  Which date Agenda uses when
                   it finds more than one date in the item or note text.  Type
                   a number from 1 to 10 (for example, if you type 3, Agenda
                   uses the third date it finds in the item or note).

Set the item       (Only for date categories)
date from done     Yes.....Assign the current system date to an item in this
key                        category when you press F4 (DONE) for that item.
                           If the item already has a date assigned, the new
                           date overrides the old one.

                   No......Don't assign a new date to an item in this
                           category when you press F4 (DONE) for that item.

Set the item       (Only for date categories)
date from when     Yes.....Assign a new date to an item in this category when
key                        you press ALT-F2 (WHEN) for that item.  (When you
                           press ALT-F2, Agenda prompts you to enter the date
                           you want to assign.)  If the item already has a
                           date assigned, the new date overrides the old one.
                   No......Don't assign a new date to an item in this category
                           when you press ALT-F2 (WHEN) for that item.

Category can use   (Only for date categories)
recurring dates    Yes.....If a date in this category includes the word
                           "each" or "every", treat it as a recurring date
                           (for example, "every Tuesday" is treated as a
                           recurring date).
                   No......Don't treat dates in this category as recurring
                           dates (for example, "every Tuesday" is interpreted
                           as "Tuesday").

SEE ALSO

File properties,   Fill in a box,   Enter dates & times,   » Index

Add Protected Category Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Accept these       (Only if you try to add a new category while the file is
category settings  sealed and Default Category Protection is set to Yes)
(they can't be
changed later)?    Yes....Add this category to the hierarchy using current
                          settings in Category Add box.  But be aware that the
                          category is protected, so you can't modify it later
                          (unless you unprotect it).

                          Tip:  To unprotect this category later, use the
                          File Properties command to unseal the file. Then use
                          the Category Properties command (Advanced Settings)
                          to change the Category Is Protected setting to No.

                   No.....Return to the Category Add box.  If you want to
                          unprotect this category before adding it, select
                          Advanced Settings then change the Category Is
                          Protected setting to No.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Discard Category Confirmation Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Category has       Yes.......Discard the highlighted category from the Agenda
assignments (or              file.  If the category has items that aren't
children, or                 assigned to another category, those items are
conditions/actions).         discarded (put in the trash). If the category has
Discard the                  child categories, they are discarded too.  If
category?                    you have defined conditions or actions for the
                             category, they are discarded with it.

                             Caution:  You can't recover the category once you
                             discard it from the Agenda file.

                             Any sections or columns that use this category as
                             a section/column head are deleted from views.

                   No........Cancel the discard operation and keep the
                             highlighted category as is in the Agenda file.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Recover discarded items,   » Index

Discard Unused Category Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Discard this       Yes.......Discard the highlighted category from the Agenda
category?                    file.  (This category does not have any items,
                             children, or conditions/actions.)

                             Caution:  You can't recover the category once you
                             discard it from the Agenda file.

                             Any sections or columns that use this category as
                             a section/column head are deleted from views.

                   No........Cancel the discard operation and keep the
                             highlighted category as is in the Agenda file.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Turn off confirm mode,   » Index

View Properties/Add/Copy Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
View name          1 to 37 character name for view.  When adding or copying a
                   view, specify the name for the new view.  When displaying
                   View Properties, you can edit existing name if you want.

Type               (Only for View Add)  Which kind of view you want to create:
                   Standard.....More common kind of view. Use standard for any
                                view that won't present info by date/time.
                   Datebook.....Specialized kind of view that presents info by
                                date/time.  Use datebook views for appointment
                                book and scheduling applications.

Section(s)         For Standard views: List of 1 or more categories to appear
                   in view as section heads.  Enter existing category names or
                   new ones.  Sections in view appear in same order as this
                   list (unless you use Section Sorting setting).
                   For Datebook views: Specify the category to be used as the
                   section head for all sections in the datebook view.

Item sorting       Displays the Item Sorting in All Sections box to control
                   the default sorting of items in every section of the view.
                   (Override this default for a particular section by using
                   the View Section Properties command.)

Section sorting    (Only if Type set to Standard)  How section heads are
                   sorted in the view to determine the order of sections:
                   None.............Don't sort section heads.
                   Category order...Sort section heads according to their
                                    order in the category hierarchy.
                   Alphabetic.......Sort section heads in alphabetical order.
                   Numeric..........Sort section heads in numeric order.

Order              (Only if Section Sorting not set to None)  The direction in
                   which to sort sections:
                   Ascending........Top to bottom of hierarchy, A to Z, 0 to 9
                   Descending.......Bottom to top of hierarchy, Z to A, 9 to 0

Hide empty         Yes....Don't display a section unless it has items.
sections           No.....Display all sections, even those with no items.

Hide done items    Yes....Don't display items that are marked done (!!).
                   No.....Display done items.

Hide dependent     Yes....Don't display items that depend (&) on other items.
items              No.....Display dependent items.

Hide inherited     Yes....Don't display items inherited by a section head.
items              No.....Display inherited items.

Hide column        Yes....Display column heads only in the first section on
heads                     the screen.  Enables you to eliminate the display of
                          redundant heads when all sections in the view have
                          the same columns (and they're in the same order).
                   No.....Display column heads in every section.

Section            Yes....Display a line between each section in the view.
separators         No.....Don't display lines.

Number items       Yes....Number items sequentially (within each section).
                   No.....Don't number the items.

View statistics    Displays the View Statistics box to show info about the
                   current view.

Named print set    (Optional) 1 to 8 character name of a print settings file
                   that is to provide the print settings for this view.  File
                   must be created with Print Named Save command.  Specify a
                   path if file isn't in current directory. Agenda assumes the
                   file has extension .NPS (if other, specify it). Example of
                   file named SAMPLE.XYZ stored on C drive in INFO directory:

                     c:\info\sample.xyz

View protection    How the view is protected from change by users:
                   No protection.....User can modify the view in any way.
                   Append only.......User can add sections/columns but can't
                                     alter existing ones or delete the view.
                   Full protection...Don't let user add columns/sections,
                                     alter columns/section, or delete views.
                   Global............Use the file's default for this setting
                                     (specified with File Properties command).

Filter             (Optional) Criteria you use to control which items appear
                   in view.  Specify standard or unindexed categories to
                   display only items assigned (or not assigned) to them.
                   Specify date categories to display only items that are
                   assigned (or not assigned) to them and have a particular
                   date/time value.  Specify numeric categories to display
                   only the items that are assigned (or not assigned) to them
                   and have a particular numeric value.

Filter             Example that displays only items assigned to the standard
                   categories Smith and Chan:

                     Filter:
                       Smith
                       Chan

Date category      (Only if Type set to Datebook)  New or existing date
                   category that Agenda uses to organize items in the datebook
                   view.  The default is the date category When (which is
                   probably what you want to use in most cases).

End category       (Optional -- only if Type set to Datebook)  New or existing
                   date category that tracks end dates for items.  Use only if
                   datebook view is to show duration of events.  (Use Date
                   Category setting to specify category that tracks the start
                   of these events.)

Period             (Only if Type set to Datebook)  The span of time that the
                   datebook view covers:

                   Day........Make view look like a daily appointment book
                              with sections for each hour of the day.

                   Week.......Make view look like a weekly appointment book
                              with sections for each day.

                   Month......Make view look like a monthly calendar with
                              sections for each day or week.

                   Quarter....Make view look like a quarterly calendar with
                              sections for each day, week, or month.

Interval           (Only if Period isn't Week)  How much time each section in
                   the datebook view is to cover:
                   15 min.....Sections for each 15 minutes of day (1:00, 1:15,
                              1:30, etc.).  For Period of Day only.
                   30 min.....Sections for each 30 minutes of day (1:00, 1:30,
                              2:00, etc.).  For Period of Day only.
                   Hourly.....Sections for each 1 hour of day (1:00, 2:00,
                              3:00, etc.).  For Period of Day only.
                   Daily......Sections for each day (Mon 11/05/90,
                              Tue 11/06/90, etc.).  For Period of Month or
                              Quarter only.
                   Weekly.....Sections for each week (Mon 11/05/90
                              Fri 11/09/90, Mon 11/12/90Fri 11/16/90, etc.).
                              For Period of Month or Quarter only.
                   Monthly....Sections for each month of the quarter
                              Thu 11/01/90Fri 11/30/90, Sat 12/01/90
                              Mon 12/31/90, etc.). For Period of Quarter only.

Start/End at       (Only if Period set to Day or Week)  The day or time on
                   which the datebook view is to start and end.

                   If Period is Day, enter a time in each setting.  To change
                   the time in either setting: press SPACEBAR to switch
                   between hour and minute, press GREY + (on numeric keypad)
                   to increase hour/minute, press GREY - to decrease.  Or
                   simply type the entire time yourself (example: 6:30pm).

                   If Period is Week, enter a day in each setting.  Default
                   for Start At is Mon.  Default for End At is Fri.  Press
                   F3 (CHOICES) to select from a list of days.

Base date on       (Only if Type set to Datebook)  Absolute or relative date
                   that is the start of the specified Period.  Relative date
                   examples: today, tomorrow, this week, next week.  Absolute
                   date example: 11/05/90.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a category,   Select a file,   Enter dates & times,   » Index

Standard Filter Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Show items         How this filter is to test the specified category to
if they are        determine which items to display in the view or section
(choice) to        (depending on whether you're defining the properties of
(specified         a view or a particular section in a view):
category)
                   Assigned.......Display only those items that are either
                                  conditionally or explicitly assigned (+) to
                                  the specified category.

                   Not assigned...Display only those items that are not
                                  assigned (-) to the specified category.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Date Filter Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Show items         How this filter is to test the specified date category to
if they are        determine which items to display in the view or section
(choice) to        (depending on whether you're defining the properties of
(date category)    a view or a particular section in a view):

                   Assigned.......Display only those items that are assigned
                                  to the specified date category.  (You can
                                  optionally fill in the Start and End Date
                                  settings to specify particular dates or
                                  times that items must have in the date
                                  category in order to be displayed.)

                   Not assigned...Display only those items that are not
                                  assigned to the specified date category.

                   Clear filter...Remove this category from the filter for the
                                  current view or section.

Start/End date     (Optional -- appears only for Assigned)  Range of dates or
                   times that items in specified date category must have in
                   order to be displayed.  Type the dates or press ALT-C (or
                   F3) to select from calendar.  Examples:

                   On or after Nov 12, 1990        From today through tomorrow
                     Start Date: 11/12/90            Start Date: today
                     End Date:                       End Date:   tomorrow
                   At or before 3:00pm today       This coming Friday only
                     Start Date:                     Start Date: Fri
                     End Date:   today at 3:00pm     End Date:   Fri

Items should be    Inside range.....Items must have dates or times that are
                                    included in the specified Start/End Date
                                    range (as shown in examples above).
                   Outside range....Items must have dates or times that are
                                    not included in the range.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Enter dates & times,   » Index

Numeric Filter Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Show items         How this filter is to test the specified numeric category
if they are        to determine which items to display in the view or section
(choice) to        (depending on whether you're defining the properties of
(numeric           a view or a particular section in a view):
category)
                   Assigned.......Display only those items that are assigned
                                  to the specified numeric category.  (You can
                                  optionally fill in the Minimum and Maximum
                                  Value settings to specify a range of numbers
                                  that items must have in the numeric category
                                  in order to be displayed.)

                   Not assigned...Display only those items that are not
                                  assigned to the specified numeric category.

                   Clear filter...Remove this category from the filter for the
                                  current view or section.

Minimum/Maximum    (Optional -- appears only for Assigned)  Range of numbers
value              that items in the specified numeric category must have in
                   order to be displayed.  Examples:

                   The number 100 or greater       Numbers from 100 to 250
                     Minumum Value: 100              Minimum Value: 100
                     Maximum Value:                  Maximum Value: 250

                   The number 250 or less          The number 100 only
                     Minimum Value:                  Minumum Value: 100
                     Maximum Value: 250              Maximum Value: 100

Items should be    Inside range.....Items must have numbers that are included
                                    in the specified Minimum/Maximum Value
                                    range (as shown in examples above).
                   Outside range....Items must have numbers that are not
                                    included in the range.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Attach Named Set Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Attach named       Yes.......Use the specified print settings (NPS) file to
set to view                  provide the Layout, Preview, and Final print
                             settings for this view (overriding the current
                             default settings).  Selecting this choice has no
                             effect on any other views.

                   No........Cancel the attach request and leave the view's
                             print settings as they were.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Item Sorting in All/Current Sections Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Sort new items     When Agenda is to sort the items in a section:
                   On leaving a section....When you highlight another section.
                   When item is entered....Each time you edit/insert an item.
                   On demand...............Only when you press ALT-S (SORT).
                   In each case, you can press ALT-S anytime to sort based on
                   current sort settings.  Note: Agenda automatically sorts
                   when you complete the Item Sorting box.

Primary sort       These settings define the major sort you want to perform.
key                Example: Sort by Lastname category to get alphabetical list
                   of who's responsible for each item (Adams, Baker, Chan).

Secondary sort     (Optional) These settings let you further sort items that
key                primary sort leaves bunched together. Example: Primary sort
                   by Lastname leaves all Bakers bunched together in a random
                   order.  A secondary sort by Firstname arranges each last
                   name bunch by first name (Ann Baker, Bob Baker, Cal Baker).

Sort on            What info Agenda should use to sort the items:
                   None............Return items to order in which they were
                                   entered.  Cancel sorting of new items.
                   Item text.......Sort alphabetically based on text of items.
                   Category........Sort child categories of a specific parent
                                   category (which causes items assigned to
                                   those child categories to be rearranged).
                   Category note...Same as Category except children are sorted
                                   not by category name but by the text of
                                   a specified line in their category notes.

Order              (Only if Sort On not set to None)  The direction in which
                   to sort the info specified in the Sort On setting:
                   Ascending.......Top to bottom of category hierarchy,
                                   A to Z, 0 to 9, January to December.
                   Descending......Bottom to top of category hierarchy,
                                   Z to A, 9 to 0, December to January.

Category           (Only if Sort On set to Category or Category Note) New or
                   existing parent category whose children you want to sort in
                   the section(s).

Sequence           (Only if sorting by Category Note or by standard category)
                   What kind of sort to perform on the child categories:
                   Category hierarchy...Sort children based on their order in
                                        category hierarchy.
                   Alphabetic...........Sort names (or note text) of children
                                        alphabetically.  Example: Apples,
                                        Bananas, Cherries.
                   Numeric..............Sort names (or note text) of children
                                        in numeric order. Example: 100-Series,
                                        200-Series, 300-Series.
                   Date.................Sort names (or note text) of children
                                        as if they're dates. Example: April 1,
                                        May 1, June 1.

Line number        (Only if Sort On set to Category Note) Number from 1 to 999
                   that specifies the line in a category note that Agenda
                   should use to perform the sort.

Sort n/a's         (Only if Sort On not set to None)  Where Agenda places
                   items that can't be sorted because the specified Sort On
                   value is not available for them:
                   Bottom of section....Put them at the end of the section,
                                        after the sorted items.
                   Top of section.......Put them at the beginning of the
                                        section, before the sorted items.

                   When sorting by Item Text, n/a means the item text is
                   blank.  When sorting by Category or Category Note, n/a
                   means the item isn't assigned to a child of the specified
                   parent category.  With Category Note, n/a can also mean
                   that the item is assigned to a child that has no note.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a category,   » Index

View Statistics Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Marked items       Shows total number of marked items (t) in all sections of
                   the current view.  These items were marked with F7 (MARK).

Sections in view   Shows total number of sections in the current view
                   (including any empty sections).

Items in view      Shows total number of items displayed in all sections of
                   the current view.

Discard View Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Delete the         Yes.......Discard the current or highlighted view from the
current view?                Agenda file.  Discarding a view has no effect on
                             the items and categories in the file.

                             Caution:  You can't recover the view once you
                             discard it from the Agenda file.

                   No........Cancel the discard operation and keep the view
                             as is in the Agenda file.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   View manager,   » Index

Item Column Properties Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Section head       Category used as the section head (the section head is
                   always the head of the item column).  To change the section
                   head, specify a different category (new or existing) or
                   edit the name of the current one.

Width              Number from 5 to 77 that specifies how wide the item column
                   is (applies if Manually is specified for Set Width).

Set width          How Agenda adjusts the width of the item column:
                   Automatically....Make the item column as wide as possible.
                   Manually.........Use the width specified in Width setting.

Minimum width      (Only if Set Width set to Automatically)  Number from 5 to
                   77 that specifies the minimum width for the item column.

Link with other    Yes....Link this column to the item columns in other
sections                  sections of the view.  Agenda treats linked columns
                          as a unit, so the changes you make to one of them
                          (such as width, formatting, column head) are
                          automatically made to all of them.

                          Example:  If you change the width of one of the
                          linked item columns to 50, all of the other linked
                          item columns change to a width of 50 too.  The
                          unlinked item columns are unchanged.

                   No.....Unlink this column from the item columns in other
                          sections of the view.  Changes you make to this
                          column won't affect any columns in other sections.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a category,   » Index

Standard Column Properties/Add Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Column head        Category to use as the column head.  To change the column
                   head, specify a different category (new or existing) or
                   edit the name of current one.

Category type      What the category (column head) is to be used for:
                   Standard.....Organize items by assigning them to 1 or more
                                of the categories in a family (hierarchy).
                   Numeric......Assign numeric values (to be used in
                                calculations) to items.
                   Date.........Assign date/time values to items.
                   Unindexed....Assign text values to items.  A text value can
                                contain letters or numbers (that you don't
                                want to use in calculations).
                   If you make a category Numeric, Date, or Unindexed, you
                   can't change it to another type later.

Width              Number from 1 to 76 that specifies how wide the column is.

Insert in          (Only for Column Add) Where to add this new column:
                   Current section...........Only in the highlighted section.
                   All sections..............In all sections of current view.

Position           (Only for Column Add) Positioning of new column in section:
                   Right of current column...To the right of the highlight.
                   Left of current column....To the left of the highlight.

Link with other    (Only for Column Properties)
sections           Yes.......................Link this column to columns in
                                             other sections with same head.
                                             Linked columns are treated as a
                                             unit: changes to one (such as
                                             width, formatting, column head)
                                             are automatically made to all.
                   No........................Unlink this column so changes to
                                             it won't affect other columns.

Format             What kind of info this column is to display about each
                   standard category it holds (you get different choices if
                   you set Category Type to Numeric, Date, or Unindexed):
                   Name only..........Name of category that item is assigned
                                      to.  Example: In Staff column, category
                                      name Cooks appears beside an item.
                   Parent:Category....Name of category that item is assigned
                                      to, preceded by the name of its parent
                                      category.  Example: In Staff column,
                                      Staff:Cooks appears beside an item.
                   Ancestor...........Ancestor of category that the item is
                                      assigned to.  (Agenda displays ancestor
                                      that is the immediate child of column
                                      head.)  Example: In Staff column (where
                                      the hierarchy Staff:Cooks:Pierre
                                      exists), the ancestor name Cooks appears
                                      beside items that pertain to Pierre.

Format             Star(*)............Display * if adjacent item is assigned
                                      to (or inherited by) the column head.
                                      Otherwise, display nothing.
                   Yes/No.............Display Y if adjacent item is assigned
                                      to (or inherited by) the column head.
                                      Otherwise, display N.
                   Category note......Display one line from the category's
                                      note.  (Such as a phone number.)

Line number        (Only if Format set to Category Note)  Number from 1 to 999
                   that specifies which line from the note to display.

Column title       (Only if Format set to Category Note)  1 to 69 character
                   title to display in this column (in place of the usual
                   column head).

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a category,   » Index

Unindexed Column Properties/Add Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Column head        Category to use as the column head.  To change the column
                   head, specify a different category (new or existing) or
                   edit the name of current one.

Category type      What the category (column head) is to be used for:
                   Standard.....Organize items by assigning them to 1 or more
                                of the categories in a family (hierarchy).
                   Numeric......Assign numeric values (to be used in
                                calculations) to items.
                   Date.........Assign date/time values to items.
                   Unindexed....Assign text values to items.  A text value can
                                contain letters or numbers (that you don't
                                want to use in calculations).
                   If you make a category Unindexed (or Numeric, or Date), you
                   can't change it to another type later.

Width              Number from 1 to 76 that specifies how wide the column is.

Insert in          (Only for Column Add) Where to display this new column:
                   Current section...........Only in the highlighted section.
                   All sections..............In all sections of current view.

Position           (Only for Column Add) Positioning of new column in section:
                   Right of current column...To the right of the highlight.
                   Left of current column....To the left of the highlight.

Link with other    (Only for Column Properties)
sections           Yes.......................Link this column to columns in
                                             other sections with same head.
                                             Linked columns are treated as a
                                             unit: changes to one (such as
                                             width, formatting, column head)
                                             are automatically made to all.
                   No........................Unlink this column so changes to
                                             it won't affect other columns.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a category,   » Index

Date Column Properties/Add Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Column head        Category to use as the column head.  To change the column
                   head, specify a different category (new or existing) or
                   edit the name of current one.

Category type      What the category (column head) is to be used for:
                   Standard.....Organize items by assigning them to 1 or more
                                of the categories in a family (hierarchy).
                   Numeric......Assign numeric values (to be used in
                                calculations) to items.
                   Date.........Assign date/time values to items.
                   Unindexed....Assign text values to items.  A text value can
                                contain letters or numbers (that you don't
                                want to use in calculations).
                   Once you make a category Date (or Numeric, or Unindexed),
                   you can't change it to another type later.

Width              Number from 1 to 76 that specifies how wide the column is.

Insert in          (Only for Column Add) Where to display this new column:
                   Current section...........Only in the highlighted section.
                   All sections..............In all sections of current view.

Position           (Only for Column Add) Positioning of new column in section:
                   Right of current column...To the right of the highlight.
                   Left of current column....To the left of the highlight.

Link with other    (Only for Column Properties)
sections           Yes.......................Link this column to columns in
                                             other sections with same head.
                                             Linked columns are treated as a
                                             unit: changes to one (such as
                                             width, formatting, column head)
                                             are automatically made to all.
                   No........................Unlink this column so changes to
                                             it won't affect other columns.

Display date       Whether the date column should display date, time, or both:
and/or time        Date only...11/30/90           Time Date...12:15pm 11/30/90
                   Date Time...11/30/90 12:15pm   Time only...12:15pm

Show day of week   Yes.........Mon 11/30/90       No..........11/30/90

Date format        How the date column should display dates:
                   MMDDYY......11/30/90           MMMDDYYYY...Nov/30/1990
                   MMDDYYYY....11/30/1990         DDMMM.......30/Nov
                   DDMMYY......30/11/90           DDMMMYY.....30/Nov/90
                   DDMMYYYY....30/11/1990         DDMMMYYYY...30/Nov/1990
                   YYMMDD......90/11/30           <Day>#......334
                   YYYYMMDD....1990/11/30         Day#........Day 334
                   YYDDMM......90/30/11           <Week>#.....47
                   YYYYDDMM....1990/30/11         Week#.......Week 47
                   MMMDD.......Nov/30             Relative....next Fri
                   MMMDDYY.....Nov/30/90          Relative#...7 days

Date separator     Punctuation mark to display between elements in a date:
                   Slash(/)....11/30/90           Comma(,)....11,30,90
                   Hyphen(-)...11-30-90           Space( )....11 30 90
                   Period(.)...11.30.90           Colon(:)....11:30:90

Clock              Which format the date column should use to display time:
                   24 hr.......13:30              12 hr.......1:30pm

Show am/pm         (Only if Clock set to 12 hr)
                   Yes.........1:30pm             No..........1:30

Time separator     Characters to display between elements in a time:
                   Colon(:)....1:30               hm..........1h30m

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a category,   » Index

Numeric Column Properties/Add Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Column head        Category to use as the column head.  To change the column
                   head, specify a different category (new or existing) or
                   edit the name of current one.

Category type      What the category (column head) is to be used for:
                   Standard.....Organize items by assigning them to 1 or more
                                of the categories in a family (hierarchy).
                   Numeric......Assign numeric values (to be used in
                                calculations) to items.
                   Date.........Assign date/time values to items.
                   Unindexed....Assign text values to items.  A text value can
                                contain letters or numbers (that you don't
                                want to use in calculations).
                   Once you make a category Numeric (or Date, or Unindexed),
                   you can't change it to another type later.

Width              Number from 1 to 76 that specifies how wide the column is.

Insert in          (Only for Column Add) Where to display this new column:
                   Current section...........Only in the highlighted section.
                   All sections..............In all sections of current view.

Position           (Only for Column Add) Positioning of new column in section:
                   Right of current column...To the right of the highlight.
                   Left of current column....To the left of the highlight.

Link with other    (Only for Column Properties)
sections           Yes.......................Link this column to columns in
                                             other sections with same head.
                                             Linked columns are treated as a
                                             unit: changes to one (such as
                                             width, formatting, column head)
                                             are automatically made to all.
                   No........................Unlink this column so changes to
                                             it won't affect other columns.

Label or           What symbol (if any) to display next to numbers:
currency symbol    None ....... 43                ¢ .......... 43¢
                   % .......... 43%               £ .......... £43
                   $ .......... $43               ¥ .......... ¥43

Decimal places     How many digits to display to right of decimal point (from
                   0 to 12).  Agenda rounds numbers that have more decimal
                   places than what is specified in this setting.  (Rounded
                   numbers are used only for display.  When performing
                   calculations, Agenda uses the entire number.)

Use thousands      Yes ........ 1,234            No .......... 1234
separator          (Choose the separator character with the Utilities
                   Customize command.)

Negative           - .......... -1234            () .......... (1234)
indicator

Display % of       Yes....Display a special "% tot" column next to the numeric
total                     column.  For each number in the numeric column, this
                          special column calculates and displays what percent
                          of the column's total that number represents (in the
                          section).  You can't enter info in the "% tot"
                          column.

                          Example:  SAMPLE-ITEMS     NUMBER    % TOT
                                       Item1           $5       10%
                                       Item2          $10       20%
                                       Item3          $25       50%
                                       Item4          $10       20%

                   No.....Don't display "% tot" column.

Count, Total,      Yes....Display selected calculations at end of section
Average, Minimum,         (results for a section apply only to that section):
Maximum                   COUNT calculates how many numbers are in column.
                          TOTAL sums up the numbers in column.
                          AVERAGE gives the average of the numbers in column.
                          MINIMUM gives the smallest number in column.
                          MAXIMUM gives the largest number in column.

                          Example:  SAMPLE-ITEMS     NUMBER
                                       Item1         $5.00
                                       Item2        $10.00
                                          COUNT           2
                                          TOTAL      $15.00
                                          AVERAGE     $7.50
                                          MINIMUM     $5.00
                                          MAXIMUM    $10.00
                   No.....Don't display that particular calculation.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a category,   » Index

Section Properties/Add Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Section head       Category used as the section head (the section head is
                   always the head of the item column).  To change the section
                   head, specify a different category (new or existing) or
                   edit the name of current one.

Insert             (Only for Section Add)  Where to insert the new section in
                   the view:
                   Below current section.....After the highlight position.
                   Above current section.....Before the highlight position.

Item sorting       Displays the Item Sorting in Current Section box to control
                   the sorting of items in this section of the view.
                   (Overrides the default item sorting specified with the
                   View Properties command).

Section            Displays the Section Statistics box to show info about the
statistics         current section.

Select numeric     (Only if the current section includes a numeric column)
functions          Displays the Select Numeric Functions box to control the
                   computations you want to perform in every numeric column of
                   current section.  (To specify computations for particular
                   numeric columns, use the View Column Properties command.)

Filter             (Optional)  Criteria you use to control which items appear
                   in the section.  Specify standard or unindexed categories
                   to display only items assigned (or not assigned) to them.
                   Specify date categories to display only items that are
                   assigned (or not assigned) to them and have a particular
                   date/time value.  Specify numeric categories to display
                   only the items that are assigned (or not assigned) to them
                   and have a particular numeric value.

                   Items must pass section filters and any view filters (set
                   up with View Properties command) to be displayed.

Filter             Example that displays only items assigned to the standard
                   categories Smith and Chan:

                     Filter:
                       Smith
                       Chan

Columns            List of 1 or more categories to display as column heads in
                   current section.  To insert more column heads in section,
                   add the appropriate categories to list.  Enter existing
                   categories or new ones.  The order of category names in the
                   list determines the order of columns in section.  To remove
                   a column head from section, remove that category from list
                   (press DEL).  To rearrange column order: ALT-F10 (MOVE).

                   The section's item column always appears in the list as
                   <Items>.  You can't remove this column from the list.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a category,   » Index

Select Numeric Functions Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Count, Total,      Yes....Display selected calculations at end of section
Average, Minimum,         (results for a section apply only to that section):
Maximum                   COUNT calculates how many numbers are in column.
                          TOTAL sums up the numbers in column.
                          AVERAGE gives the average of the numbers in column.
                          MINIMUM gives the smallest number in column.
                          MAXIMUM gives the largest number in column.

                          Example:  SAMPLE-ITEMS     NUMBER
                                       Item1         $5.00
                                       Item2        $10.00
                                          COUNT           2
                                          TOTAL      $15.00
                                          AVERAGE     $7.50
                                          MINIMUM     $5.00
                                          MAXIMUM    $10.00
                   No.....Don't display that particular calculation.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Section Statistics Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Items in           Shows the total number of items displayed in the current
section            section of the view.

Discard Empty View Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
No sections left   Yes.......Discard the current view from the Agenda file.
in the view.                 (This view is currently empty because you've
Discard the view?            removed all sections from it.)  Discarding a view
                             has no effect on the items and categories in the
                             file.

                   No........Keep this view in the file.  Agenda automatically
                             displays the View Properties box so you can
                             specify section(s) for the view (you must specify
                             at least one section to keep this view from being
                             removed from the file).

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   View manager,   » Index

Views: Final Print Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Print              What part of the current view to print (use Include setting
                   to specify what info to print from this part of the view):
                   View...................All of the current view.
                   Marked items in view...All items you've marked (t) in view.
                   Section................The current section only.
                   Current item...........The highlighted item only.
                   Assignment profile.....Category assignments of current item
                                          or marked items (if any).

Include            (Except if Print is set to Assignment Profile)  What kinds
                   of info to print:
                   Items..................The text of each selected item.
                   Items & notes..........The text of each selected item and
                                          its accompanying note text.
                   Notes only.............The note text of each selected item
                                          (but not the item text itself).

Print to           Where to send the print output:
                   Printer................The printer specified in the Printer
                                          setting.
                   File with printer
                   codes..................A ready-to-print output file (.PRN)
                                          with codes to do print formatting.
                   Text file (without
                   printer codes).........A plain ASCII text file (.PRT)
                                          containing no special codes.
                   Lotus Manuscript
                   file...................A file created in the Lotus
                                          Manuscript format (.DOC).
                   DCA file...............A file in standard word processing
                                          format (.DCA).

Printer            The device on which to print.  The choices are the primary
                   and secondary printers specified with Print Setup command.

File               (Only if Print To specifies a file type)  1 to 8 character
                   name of file to hold print output.  Specify a path if file
                   is not in current directory (for example, c:\info\sample).
                   Agenda automatically appends appropriate extension to file
                   name depending on file type (see description of Print To
                   setting).  If you want a different extension, specify it.

                   If you don't specify a print file name, default is the name
                   of current Agenda file (with the appended print extension).

From/To page       The range of pages to print.  From Page is number of page
                   on which to start printing (from 1 to 999).  To Page is
                   number of last page to print (from 1 to 999).  To print
                   just one page, specify it in both settings.

Page number of     The page number Agenda is to print on the starting page
first page         (specify starting page in From Page setting).  Example: 25

Copies             The number of copies to print (from 1 to 99).

Double sided       Yes..........Print on both sides of the paper (only for
                                printers that support this feature).
                   No...........Print on just one side.

Sort output        Yes..........Print pages in first-to-last order (1, 2, 3,
pages                           etc.). If your printer stacks pages backwards,
                                Agenda still sorts the document in the correct
                                order (so first page ends up on top).
                   No...........Don't sort the pages.

Orientation        The orientation of the print on output pages:
                   Portrait.....+---+      Landscape.....+--------+
                                |   |                    |        |
                                |   |                    +--------+
                                +---+

Forms              What type of paper the printer uses:
                   Continuous......Agenda automatically feeds sheets to
                                   printer as needed.
                   Single sheet
                   (auto feed).....Agenda automatically feeds sheets to
                                   printer as needed.
                   Single sheet
                   (manual feed)...Agenda prompts you to feed sheets to
                                   printer.

Print headers      Yes.............When printing document, include the headers
and footers                        and footers specified with the Print Layout
                                   command.
                   No..............Don't include headers and footers on the
                                   printed document.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a file,   » Index

Notes/Macro Editor: Final Print Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Print              What part of the current note/macro to print:
                   All text in note.......The entire note/macro.
                   Marked text............Only the text marked with F7 (MARK).

Print to           Where to send the print output:
                   Printer................The device named in Printer setting.

                   File w/printer codes...A ready-to-print output file (.PRN)
                                          with codes to do print formatting.
                   Text file (without
                   printer codes).........A plain ASCII text file (.PRT)
                                          containing no special codes.
                   Lotus Manuscript
                   file...................A file created in the Lotus
                                          Manuscript format (.DOC).
                   DCA file...............A file in standard word processing
                                          format (.DCA).

Printer            The device on which to print.  The choices are the primary
                   and secondary printers specified with Print Setup command.

File               (Only if Print To specifies a file type)  1 to 8 character
                   name of file to hold print output.  Specify a path if file
                   not in current directory.  Agenda appends extension to name
                   depending on file type (see Print To setting).  To use a
                   different extension, specify it. Default print file name is
                   same as Agenda file's name (with appended print extension).

From/To page       The range of pages to print.  From Page is number of page
                   on which to start printing (from 1 to 999).  To Page is
                   number of last page to print (from 1 to 999).  To print
                   just one page, specify it in both settings.

Page number of     The page number Agenda is to print on the starting page
first page         (specify starting page in From Page setting).  Example: 25

Copies             The number of copies to print (from 1 to 99).

Double sided       Yes..........Print on both sides of the paper (only for
                                printers that support this feature).
                   No...........Print on just one side.

Sort output        Yes..........Print pages in first-to-last order (1, 2, 3,
pages                           etc.). If your printer stacks pages backwards,
                                Agenda still sorts the document in the correct
                                order (so first page ends up on top).
                   No...........Don't sort the pages.

Orientation        The orientation of the print on output pages:
                   Portrait.....+---+      Landscape.....+--------+
                                |   |                    |        |
                                |   |                    +--------+
                                +---+

Forms              What type of paper the printer uses:
                   Continuous......Agenda automatically feeds sheets to
                                   printer as needed.
                   Single sheet
                   (auto feed).....Agenda automatically feeds sheets to
                                   printer as needed.
                   Single sheet
                   (manual feed)...Agenda prompts you to feed sheets to
                                   printer.

Print headers      Yes.............When printing document, include the headers
and footers                        and footers specified with the Print Layout
                                   command.
                   No..............Don't include headers and footers on the
                                   printed document.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a file,   » Index

Category Manager: Final Print Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Print              What part of the current Agenda file to print:
                   Category hierarchy.....The list of all categories in this
                                          Agenda file. Use the Include setting
                                          to specify what info to print from
                                          these categories.
                   File info..............Information about this Agenda file,
                                          including: description, associated
                                          files, and statistics.

Include            (Only if Print is set to Category Hierarchy)  What kinds
                   of info to print:
                   Categories.............The names of all categories (in
                                          hierarchical order).
                   Categories & notes.....The names of all categories and
                                          their accompanying note text.
                   Notes only.............The note text of each category (but
                                          not the hierarchical list).

Print to           Where to send the print output:
                   Printer................The printer specified in the Printer
                                          setting.
                   File with printer
                   codes..................A ready-to-print output file (.PRN)
                                          with codes to do print formatting.
                   Text file (without
                   printer codes).........A plain ASCII text file (.PRT)
                                          containing no special codes.
                   Lotus Manuscript
                   file...................A file created in the Lotus
                                          Manuscript format (.DOC).
                   DCA file...............A file in standard word processing
                                          format (.DCA).

Printer            The device on which to print.  The choices are the primary
                   and secondary printers specified with Print Setup command.

File               (Only if Print To specifies a file type)  1 to 8 character
                   name of file to hold print output.  Specify a path if file
                   is not in current directory (for example, c:\info\sample).
                   Agenda automatically appends appropriate extension to file
                   name depending on file type (see description of Print To
                   setting).  If you want a different extension, specify it.

                   If you don't specify a print file name, default is the name
                   of current Agenda file (with the appended print extension).

From/To page       The range of pages to print.  From Page is number of page
                   on which to start printing (from 1 to 999).  To Page is
                   number of last page to print (from 1 to 999).  To print
                   just one page, specify it in both settings.

Page number of     The page number Agenda is to print on the starting page
first page         (specify starting page in From Page setting).  Example: 25

Copies             The number of copies to print (from 1 to 99).

Double sided       Yes..........Print on both sides of the paper (only for
                                printers that support this feature).
                   No...........Print on just one side.

Sort output        Yes..........Print pages in first-to-last order (1, 2, 3,
pages                           etc.). If your printer stacks pages backwards,
                                Agenda still sorts the document in the correct
                                order (so first page ends up on top).
                   No...........Don't sort the pages.

Orientation        The orientation of the print on output pages:
                   Portrait.....+---+      Landscape.....+--------+
                                |   |                    |        |
                                |   |                    +--------+
                                +---+

Forms              What type of paper the printer uses:
                   Continuous......Agenda automatically feeds sheets to
                                   printer as needed.
                   Single sheet
                   (auto feed).....Agenda automatically feeds sheets to
                                   printer as needed.
                   Single sheet
                   (manual feed)...Agenda prompts you to feed sheets to
                                   printer.

Print headers      Yes.............When printing document, include the headers
and footers                        and footers specified with the Print Layout
                                   command.
                   No..............Don't include headers and footers on the
                                   printed document.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a file,   » Index

Views: Print Layout Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Printer            The device on which to print.  The choices are the primary
                   and secondary printers specified with Print Setup command.

Paper size         The kind and size of paper your printer is to use.  Press
                   F3 (CHOICES) to select from a list of many common form
                   types.  To use a non-standard paper size, select Custom
                   then fill in the Width and Length settings.

Width              (Only if Paper Size is Custom)  The width of the paper your
                   printer is to use.  Specify a decimal number from 1 to 17
                   (default is 8.5 in).  Use Margin Units setting to switch
                   from inches to millimeters or centimeters.

Length             (Only if Paper Size is Custom) The length of the paper your
                   printer is to use.  Specify a decimal number from 1 to 22
                   (default is 11 in).  Use Margin Units setting to switch
                   from inches to millimeters or centimeters.

Orientation        The orientation of the print on output pages:
                   Portrait.....+---+      Landscape.....+--------+
                                |   |                    |        |
                                |   |                    +--------+
                                +---+
Margin units       Unit of measure to use for layout sizes (margins, custom
                   width/length, spacing and indents for headers/footers):

                   in.....Inches.  Lets you specify sizes to 2 decimal places
                          (example: 9.25 in).
                   cm.....Centimeters.  Lets you specify sizes to 2 decimal
                          places (example: 23.16 cm).
                   mm.....Millimeters.  Lets you specify sizes to 1 decimal
                          place (example: 231.6 mm).

                   When you change units, Agenda automatically converts all
                   settings to the appropriate equivalent.

Line spacing       Vertical spacing to leave between each printed line (from 1
                   to 150).  Example: Enter 2 for double-spaced printing.

Indent notes       Number of spaces (from 0 to 99) to indent from left and
                   right margins when printing item notes and category notes.

                   Align notes with margins: Enter 0.
                   Indent into print area: Enter positive number (example: 5).

Header/Footer      Displays the Header and Footer box to specify header and/or
                   footer text to print at top and bottom of each page.  The
                   header/footer text you enter applies to all documents you
                   print from this Agenda file (except views with a Named
                   Print Settings file attached).  But for other layout info,
                   Agenda maintains separate settings for the 3 different
                   kinds of documents: view, note/macro, category.

Margins            The spacing of margins on the printed page:

                   +-----------------+   For each margin, specify a decimal
                   |       TOP       |   number from 0 to 10 (default: 1 in).
                   |  +-----------+  |   Use Margin Units setting to switch
                   |L |           | R|   from inches to millimeters (0 to 254)
                   |E |           | I|   or centimeters (0 to 26).
                   |F |           | G|
                   |T |           | H|
                   |  |           | T|
                   |  +-----------+  |
                   |     BOTTOM      |
                   +-----------------+

                   Note: Some printers have minimum margin sizes.  If the
                   margins you specify are too narrow, Agenda uses the
                   appropriate minimum sizes.

Separators         What kind of visual separation you want on the printed page
                   between different kinds of info:
                   None.........Don't print a separator line.
                   Line.........Print a solid line to separate the info.
                   Page break...Start a new page to separate the info.

                   You can specify a separator for these 4 different areas of
                   the page: After Items/Notes, Between Item and Note, After
                   Section Head, After Sections.

Spacing            How many lines of spacing to leave between different kinds
                   of info on the printed page.  Enter a number from 1 to
                   150 with up to one decimal place (example: 1.5).

                   You can specify spacing for these 4 different areas of
                   the page: After Items/Notes, Between Item and Note, After
                   Section Head, After Sections.

Font               Which fonts to use to print notes, items, section heads,
                   column heads, column entries, and calculation labels. Press
                   F3 (CHOICES) to select from a list of the available fonts
                   for your primary or secondary printer (depending on which
                   is specified in Printer setting).

                   To change which fonts are available for your printers, use
                   the Print Setup command.

Attribute          Which attributes to use to print notes, items, section
                   heads, column heads, column entries, and calculation
                   labels.  Press F3 (CHOICES) to select one or more of these
                   attributes: Normal, Bold, Italic, Underscore Words,
                   Underscore All, Double Underscore Words, Double Underscore
                   All, Subscript, Superscript, Strikethrough, Small Caps.

                   Agenda won't let you pick conflicting combinations.

Alignment          How to align notes, items, section heads, column heads,
                   column entries, and calculation labels on the printed page.
                   Select from 4 kinds of alignment: Left, Right, Center, or
                   Even.

                   +----------------------+     Each kind of alignment
                   |Example of LEFT       |     justifies text within the
                   |                      |     appropriate "column" (for
                   |      Example of RIGHT|     example, item text is aligned
                   |                      |     within the item column, note
                   |   Example of CENTER  |     text is aligned on the full
                   |                      |     page).
                   |Example    of     EVEN|
                   +----------------------+

                   Note: Numeric columns are automatically Right aligned. You
                   can't change their alignment.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Notes/Macro Editor: Print Layout Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Printer            The device on which to print.  The choices are the primary
                   and secondary printers specified with Print Setup command.

Paper size         The kind and size of paper your printer is to use.  Press
                   F3 (CHOICES) to select from a list of many common form
                   types.  To use a non-standard paper size, select Custom
                   then fill in the Width and Length settings.

Width              (Only if Paper Size is Custom)  The width of the paper your
                   printer is to use.  Specify a decimal number from 1 to 17
                   (default is 8.5 in).  Use Margin Units setting to switch
                   from inches to millimeters or centimeters.

Length             (Only if Paper Size is Custom) The length of the paper your
                   printer is to use.  Specify a decimal number from 1 to 22
                   (default is 11 in).  Use Margin Units setting to switch
                   from inches to millimeters or centimeters.

Orientation        The orientation of the print on output pages:
                   Portrait.....+---+      Landscape.....+--------+
                                |   |                    |        |
                                |   |                    +--------+
                                +---+
Margin units       Unit of measure to use for layout sizes:
                   in.....Inches.  Lets you specify sizes to 2 decimal places
                          (example: 9.25 in).
                   cm.....Centimeters.  Lets you specify sizes to 2 decimal
                          places (example: 23.16 cm).
                   mm.....Millimeters.  Lets you specify sizes to 1 decimal
                          place (example: 231.6 mm).
                   If you change units, Agenda automatically converts affected
                   settings (such as Margins) to the appropriate equivalent.

Line spacing       Vertical spacing to leave between each printed line (from 1
                   to 150).  Example: Enter 2 for double-spaced printing.

Header/Footer      Displays Header and Footer box to specify text to print at
                   top & bottom of page.  Header/footer text applies to entire
                   Agenda file (except views with Named Print Settings file
                   attached).  All other header/footer layout info is specific
                   to current document type (view, note/macro, or category).

Margins            +-----------------+   Spacing of margins on printed page:
                   |       TOP       |
                   |  +-----------+  |   For each margin, enter decimal number
                   |L |           | R|   from 0 to 10 (default: 1 in).  Use
                   |E |           | I|   Margin Units setting to switch from
                   |F |           | G|   inches to millimeters (0 to 254) or
                   |T |           | H|   centimeters (0 to 26).
                   |  |           | T|
                   |  +-----------+  |   Note: Some printers have minimum
                   |     BOTTOM      |   margin sizes. If your margins are too
                   +-----------------+   narrow, Agenda uses those minimums.

Font               Which font to use to print notes/macros.  Press F3
                   (CHOICES) to select from a list of the available fonts for
                   your primary or secondary printer (depending on which is
                   specified in Printer setting).

                   To change which fonts are available for your printers, use
                   Print Setup command.

Attribute          Which attributes to use to print notes/macros.  Press F3
                   (CHOICES) to select one or more of these attributes:
                   Normal, Bold, Italic, Underscore Words, Underscore All,
                   Double Underscore Words, Double Underscore All, Subscript,
                   Superscript, Strikethrough, Small Caps.

                   Agenda won't let you pick conflicting combinations.

Alignment          How to align notes/macros on the printed page.  Select from
                   4 kinds of alignment: Left, Right, Center, or Even.

                   +----------------------+
                   |Example of LEFT       |
                   |                      |
                   |      Example of RIGHT|
                   |                      |
                   |   Example of CENTER  |
                   |                      |
                   |Example    of     EVEN|
                   +----------------------+

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Category Manager: Print Layout Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Printer            The device on which to print.  The choices are the primary
                   and secondary printers specified with Print Setup command.

Paper size         The kind and size of paper your printer is to use.  Press
                   F3 (CHOICES) to select from a list of many common form
                   types.  To use a non-standard paper size, select Custom
                   then fill in the Width and Length settings.

Width              (Only if Paper Size is Custom)  The width of the paper your
                   printer is to use.  Specify a decimal number from 1 to 17
                   (default is 8.5 in).  Use Margin Units setting to switch
                   from inches to millimeters or centimeters.

Length             (Only if Paper Size is Custom) The length of the paper your
                   printer is to use.  Specify a decimal number from 1 to 22
                   (default is 11 in).  Use Margin Units setting to switch
                   from inches to millimeters or centimeters.

Orientation        The orientation of the print on output pages:
                   Portrait.....+---+      Landscape.....+--------+
                                |   |                    |        |
                                |   |                    +--------+
                                +---+
Margin units       Unit of measure to use for layout sizes (margins, custom
                   width/length, spacing and indents for headers/footers):

                   in.....Inches.  Lets you specify sizes to 2 decimal places
                          (example: 9.25 in).
                   cm.....Centimeters.  Lets you specify sizes to 2 decimal
                          places (example: 23.16 cm).
                   mm.....Millimeters.  Lets you specify sizes to 1 decimal
                          place (example: 231.6 mm).

                   When you change units, Agenda automatically converts all
                   settings to the appropriate equivalent.

Line spacing       Vertical spacing to leave between each printed line (from 1
                   to 150).  Example: Enter 2 for double-spaced printing.

Indent notes       Number of spaces (from 0 to 99) to indent from left and
                   right margins when printing category notes.

                   Align notes with margins: Enter 0.
                   Indent into print area: Enter positive number (example: 5).

Header/Footer      Displays the Header and Footer box to specify header and/or
                   footer text to print at top and bottom of each page.  The
                   header/footer text you enter applies to all documents you
                   print from this Agenda file (except views with a Named
                   Print Settings file attached).  But for other layout info,
                   Agenda maintains separate settings for the 3 different
                   kinds of documents: view, note/macro, category.

Margins            The spacing of margins on the printed page:

                   +-----------------+   For each margin, specify a decimal
                   |       TOP       |   number from 0 to 10 (default: 1 in).
                   |  +-----------+  |   Use Margin Units setting to switch
                   |L |           | R|   from inches to millimeters (0 to 254)
                   |E |           | I|   or centimeters (0 to 26).
                   |F |           | G|
                   |T |           | H|
                   |  |           | T|
                   |  +-----------+  |
                   |     BOTTOM      |
                   +-----------------+

                   Note: Some printers have minimum margin sizes.  If the
                   margins you specify are too narrow, Agenda uses the
                   appropriate minimum sizes.

Separators         What kind of visual separation you want on the printed page
                   between different kinds of info:

                   None.....Don't print a separator line.
                   Line.....Print a solid line to separate the specified info.

                   You can specify a separator for these 2 different areas of
                   the page: After Categories/Notes, Between Category and
                   Note.

Spacing            How many lines of spacing to leave between different kinds
                   of info on the printed page.  Enter a number from 1 to
                   150 with up to one decimal place (example: 1.5).

                   You can specify spacing for these 2 different areas of
                   the page: After Categories/Notes, Between Category and
                   Note.

Font               Which fonts to use to print categories and their notes.
                   Press F3 (CHOICES) to select from a list of the available
                   fonts for your primary or secondary printer (depending on
                   which is specified in Printer setting).

                   To change which fonts are available for your printers, use
                   the Print Setup command.

Attribute          Which attributes to use to print categories and their
                   notes.  Press F3 (CHOICES) to select one or more of these
                   attributes: Normal, Bold, Italic, Underscore Words,
                   Underscore All, Double Underscore Words, Double Underscore
                   All, Subscript, Superscript, Strikethrough, Small Caps.

                   Agenda won't let you pick conflicting combinations.

Alignment          How to align notes on the printed page.  Select from 4
                   kinds of alignment: Left, Right, Center, or Even.

                   +----------------------+
                   |Example of LEFT       |
                   |                      |
                   |      Example of RIGHT|
                   |                      |
                   |   Example of CENTER  |
                   |                      |
                   |Example    of     EVEN|
                   +----------------------+

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Header and Footer Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Font               Font for headers/footers. Press F3 (CHOICES) to select from
                   list of valid fonts for your primary or secondary printer
                   (depending on which is specified in Print Layout box).  To
                   change fonts for your printers, use Print Setup command.

                   Tip: To use other fonts in a portion of header/footer text,
                   press F2 (EDIT) on a particular line and then F6 (MARKER).

Attribute          Attributes for headers/footers.  Press F3 (CHOICES) to
                   select one or more: Normal, Bold, Italic, Underscore Words,
                   Underscore All, Double Underscore Words, Double Underscore
                   All, Subscript, Superscript, Strikethrough, Small Caps.
                   Agenda won't let you pick conflicting combinations.

                   Tip: To use other attributes in a portion of header or
                   footer text, press F2 (EDIT) on a particular line and then
                   F6 (MARKER).

Space              Amount of whitespace between the header (Space Below) or
below/above        footer (Space Above) and the rest of the page's text. Enter
                   a decimal number from 0 to 10 (default is 0.5 in).  Use
                   Margin Units setting in Print Layout box to switch from
                   inches to millimeters or centimeters.

Indent             Number of spaces (from -10 to 10) to indent from left and
                   right margins when printing header or footer.

                   Align header or footer with margins: Enter 0.
                   Indent into print area: Enter positive number (example: 5).
                   Outdent into margins: Enter negative number (example: -5).

Line               Yes.....Draw a line between the header (Line Below) or
below/above                footer (Line Above) and the rest of the page's
                           text.
                   No......Don't draw a line.

Line 1, Line 2,    The header or footer text to print on each page.  For
Line 3             example, if you specify this header text:

                                Left            Center            Right
                   Line 1: LARGE CORP.    : DEPT Z         :
                   Line 2:                :                : PREPARED BY
                   Line 3: WEEKLY REPORT  :                : F. QUIMBY

                   You get a printed header that looks like this:
                   +---------------------------------------------------------+
                   | LARGE CORP.             DEPT Z                          |
                   |                                             PREPARED BY |
                   | WEEKLY REPORT                                 F. QUIMBY |
                   +---------------------------------------------------------+

Line 1, Line 2,    You can enter header/footer text on any one of the lines or
Line 3             on any combination of lines (examples: just on Line 1 or
                   just on Lines 1 and 3).  On each line, the combined Left,
                   Center, and Right text can contain up to 237 characters.
                   The Left, Center, and Right settings scroll to accommodate
                   long text.

                   Tip: To change fonts and attributes of header/footer text
                   or to print special info such as the date and time, press
                   F2 (EDIT) on a particular line and then F6 (MARKER).

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   About printing,   » Index

Print Preview Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Print              Which info from current Agenda file to preview on screen
                   before printing.  (To print this info, use Print Final
                   command.  Changes you make to Preview settings are
                   automatically applied to Final settings, and vice versa.)

                   When previewing from a view, you can choose:
                   View...................All of the current view.
                   Marked items in view...All items you've marked (t) in view.
                   Section................The current section only.
                   Current item...........The highlighted item only.
                   Assignment profile.....Category assignments of current item
                                          or marked items (if any).

                   When previewing from a note/macro, you can choose:
                   All text in note.......The entire note/macro.
                   Marked text............Only the text marked with F7 (MARK).

Print              When previewing from the category manager, you can choose:

                   Category hierarchy.....The list of all categories in this
                                          Agenda file.
                   File info..............Information about this Agenda file,
                                          including: description, associated
                                          files, and statistics.

Include            (Only in a view or the category manager) What kinds of info
                   to preview.  When previewing from a view, you can choose:

                   Items..................The text of each selected item.
                   Items & notes..........The text of each selected item and
                                          its accompanying note text.
                   Notes only.............The note text of each selected item,
                                          but not the item text itself.

Include            When previewing from the category manager, you can choose:

                   Categories.............The names of all categories (in
                                          hierarchical order).
                   Categories & notes.....The names of all categories and
                                          their accompanying note text.
                   Notes only.............The note text of each category, but
                                          not the hierarchical list.

Printer            The device you plan to use later when you actually print.
                   The choices are the primary and secondary printers
                   specified with Print Setup command.

From/To page       The range of pages to preview.  From Page is number of page
                   to start previewing (from 1 to 999).  To Page is number of
                   last page to preview (from 1 to 999).  To preview just one
                   page, specify it in both settings.

Page number of     The page number Agenda is to display on the starting page
first page         (specify starting page in From Page setting).  Example: 25

Print headers      Yes..........When previewing document, include the headers
and footers                     and footers specified with the Print Layout
                                command.
                   No...........Don't include headers and footers on the
                                previewed document.

Orientation        The orientation of the print on output pages:

                   Portrait.....+---+      Landscape.....+--------+
                                |   |                    |        |
                                |   |                    +--------+
                                +---+

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Save Print Settings Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
File name          1 to 8 character name of the file in which you want to save
                   the Layout, Preview, and Final print settings from the
                   current Agenda file.  Specify a path if you want to save
                   the file in a directory other than current one.  Agenda
                   gives the file the extension .NPS (unless you type a
                   different extension).

                   For example, to specify file named SAMPLE with extension
                   XYZ stored on C drive in the INFO directory, type:

                     c:\info\sample.xyz

                   Once you save an NPS file, you can retrieve it in any other
                   Agenda file or attach it to any view to use the print
                   settings it contains.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a file,   » Index

Retrieve Print Settings Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
File name          1 to 8 character name of the named print settings (NPS)
                   file you want to retrieve.  Agenda uses the print settings
                   from this NPS file (Layout, Preview, and Final settings) as
                   the defaults for the current Agenda file.  (But these
                   settings won't affect views that have other NPS files
                   attached to them.)

                   Specify a path if the NPS file isn't stored in current
                   directory.  Agenda assumes the file has .NPS extension (if
                   file has a different extension, specify it).  The file
                   must have been created with the Print Named Save command.

                   For example, to specify file named SAMPLE with extension
                   XYZ stored on C drive in the INFO directory, type:

                     c:\info\sample.xyz

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a file,   » Index

Replace NPS File Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Replace the        Yes.......Completely replace the contents of the target
existing named               NPS file (which already exists on disk) with the
print set file?              print settings (Layout, Preview, and Final
                             settings) from the current Agenda file.  Views
                             that have this NPS file attached to them
                             automatically use the new settings you save.

                   No........Cancel the command and leave the existing NPS
                             file unchanged.  Agenda returns you to the Save
                             Print Settings box where you can specify a
                             different name for the NPS file to save.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Erase Print Settings Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
File name          1 to 8 character name of the named print settings (NPS)
                   file you want to erase from disk.  Specify a path if the
                   NPS file isn't stored in current directory.  Agenda assumes
                   that the file has the extension .NPS (if file has a
                   different extension, specify it).

                   For example, to specify file named SAMPLE with extension
                   XYZ stored on C drive in the INFO directory, type:

                     c:\info\sample.xyz

                   Important: When you erase an NPS file, Agenda automatically
                   detaches it from all views it was attached to in the
                   current Agenda file.  If the erased NPS file is attached to
                   views in other Agenda files, you are prompted to detach it
                   when you work with those Agenda files.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a file,   » Index

Erase NPS File Confirmation Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Erase the named    Yes.......Erase the specified NPS file from disk.  Once you
print set file               erase the file, you can't recover it in Agenda.
from the disk?
                             Important:  When you erase an NPS file, Agenda
                             automatically detaches it from all views it was
                             attached to in the current Agenda file.  If the
                             erased NPS file is attached to views in other
                             Agenda files, you are prompted to detach it when
                             you work with those Agenda files.

                   No........Cancel the Erase command and leave the specified
                             NPS file unchanged.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Erase Attached NPS File Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
File has           Yes.......Erase the specified NPS file from disk.  Once you
attachments to               erase the file, you can't recover it in Agenda.
views in current
file.  Erase from            Important:  When you erase an NPS file, Agenda
disk?                        automatically detaches it from all views it was
                             attached to in the current Agenda file.  If the
                             erased NPS file is attached to views in other
                             Agenda files, you are prompted to detach it when
                             you work with those Agenda files.

                   No........Cancel the Erase command and leave the specified
                             NPS file unchanged.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Attach Print Settings Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
File name          1 to 8 character name of the named print settings (NPS)
                   file you want to attach to the current view.  Agenda uses
                   the print settings from this NPS file (Layout, Preview, and
                   Final settings) as the defaults for the view.  (These
                   settings won't affect printing in other views.)

                   Specify a path if the NPS file isn't stored in current
                   directory.  Agenda assumes the file has .NPS extension (if
                   file has a different extension, specify it).  The file
                   must have been created with the Print Named Save command.

                   For example, to specify file named SAMPLE with extension
                   XYZ stored on C drive in the INFO directory, type:

                     c:\info\sample.xyz

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a file,   » Index

Detach Print Settings Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Detach the         Yes.......Stop using the current NPS file to provide this
current named                view with its print settings.  Instead, use the
print set file               new NPS file you have specified (or, if none, use
from the view?               the default print settings of the Agenda file).

                             Note:  Detaching does not change the contents of
                             the NPS file or delete it from disk. Detaching an
                             NPS file from one view doesn't detach it from
                             other views it is attached to.

                   No........Cancel the request and keep the current NPS file
                             attached to this view.

                   Special case:  Agenda may display this prompt if it can't
                   find the NPS file that is currently attached to the view
                   you're using.  (This can happen if you've erased the NPS
                   file or moved it to a different directory.)

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Utilities Customize Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Color              Which set of screen colors you want to display in Agenda:
                   Mono......Use the standard Agenda monochrome screen format.
                   Color.....Use the standard Agenda screen colors.
                   Plasma....Use the standard Agenda plasma screen format.
                   Custom....Specify your own colors for the Agenda screens.
                             Use the Set Custom Colors setting (shown below).

Set custom         (Only if Color is set to Custom)  Displays the Custom
colors             Colors box to let you specify your own colors for various
                   parts of Agenda.

Display key map    Yes.......Display the function key map at the bottom of the
                             screen.  (You can also press ALT-K to turn the
                             key map on and off.)
                   No........Remove the function key map so that Agenda can
                             use more of the screen to display items,
                             categories and other info.

Display cond/act   Yes.......Display condition and action descriptions after
info                         each category name in category manager.  Example:

                               SampleCategory  C= Fred  A= HighPriority

                   No........Don't display this info after each category name.

Display carriage   Yes.......Display the triangle symbol («) wherever there is
returns                      a carriage return.
                   No........Don't display symbols to show carriage returns.

Item tag           The character to display in front of each item in a view.
character          Example of the default ():
                       Call Fred at 10:00 today
                       Meet with Ralph tomorrow
                   Select any one of these tag characters: = o »  + - > *
                   = ·  + ¿ ¿ ¿ (and space).

Beep on            Yes...........Agenda beeps whenever you type a name that
auto-completion                  matches an existing one.
                   No............Don't beep when a name match occurs.

Suppress snow      Yes...........Stop video interference (use only if you see
                                 snow on monitor when running Agenda).  This
                                 option slows performance on most systems.
                   No............Don't use snow suppression.

Decimal            Which symbol Agenda uses for decimal point in numbers:
separator          . (dot)...... $123.45
                   , (comma).... £123,45

Thousands          Which symbol Agenda uses to separate thousands in numbers:
separator          , (comma).... 123,456
                   . (dot)...... 123.456
                     (space).... 123 456

Text marker        How attribute, font, and special markers in text are to
display            appear on screen (doesn't affect printing):
                   Hidden...............Don't display markers on screen.
                   Diamond (t)..........Display t where each marker is.
                   Long.................Display the name of each marker.
                                        Example: [Date] appears on screen at
                                        the location of each date marker.
                   To insert markers, press F6 (MARKER) while editing text.

Character set      The character set Agenda uses for multilingual characters:

                   Use Agenda default
                   (CP 850).............The correct choice for most computers.
                   Translate (CP 850
                   to 437)..............If the computer uses Code Page 437 and
                                        your text has multilingual characters
                                        not supported by Code Page 850.

Auto-save          How often Agenda is to automatically save the current
interval           Agenda file to disk.  If you don't want the file to be
                   saved automatically, type 0.  Otherwise, type the number of
                   minutes (from 1 to 60).

Memory usage       Displays the Memory Usage box to control how Agenda uses
                   the computer's memory and to show current memory info.

Confirm mode       Yes.....Turn on Confirmation mode (which causes Agenda to
                           prompt you for confirmation before performing
                           major operations).

                   No......Turn off Confirmation mode.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Custom Colors Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
View, Category     Select screen colors for various parts of Agenda.  Press
Manager, Boxes,    F3 (CHOICES) for the list of available colors.  Notice the
etc.               Sample Text at the bottom of the box -- it shows a sample
                   of the currently selected color.

Drop shadow        Yes....Display shadows behind the dialog boxes that appear
                          on the screen (to make them look 3-dimensional).
                   No.....Don't display shadows.

Animation          Yes....Use animation to pop up dialog boxes on the screen
                          (so they appear to grow toward you).
                   No.....Don't use animation.

Wide border        Yes....Display wide borders around dialog boxes.
                   No.....Display narrow borders.

Use default        Displays the Default Colors box to let you change all
colors             current custom color settings to the default settings.
                   You can choose to take the defaults from one of the 3
                   pre-defined Agenda color sets: Color, Mono, or Plasma.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Default Colors Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Take colors        Which default color settings to use to replace the current
from               custom colors:

                   Mono......Take the defaults from the standard Agenda
                             monochrome set.

                   Color.....Take the defaults from the standard Agenda color
                             set.

                   Plasma....Take the defaults from the standard Agenda
                             plasma set.

                   If you don't want to replace all of your custom colors with
                   one of these sets, press ESC.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Memory Usage Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
DOS memory used    How much regular memory is available on your computer to
for data is        hold the data from Agenda file.  (You can't type here.)

Expanded memory    If you have expanded memory (EMS), shows how much is used
used for data is   to hold the data from Agenda file.  (You can't type here.)

Expanded memory    If you have expanded memory, shows how much is used to
used for program   temporarily store portions of the Agenda program itself.
is                 (You can't type here.)

Maximum expanded   Maximum amount of expanded memory allocated to hold data
memory for data    from Agenda file.  Type number from 64 to 8192 (K bytes).

Maximum memory     Amount of virtual memory Agenda can use for printing (in K
for printing       bytes).  To print long documents (over 50 pages), you may
                   need to increase this value.  Press GREY + key (on numeric
                   keypad) to increase print memory (GREY - to decrease).

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Utilities Execute Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Apply conditions   Name of an existing category whose conditions you want to
attached to        apply.  Agenda automatically applies all conditions defined
category and       for this category's children as well.  To apply all
children of        conditions in the Agenda file, specify the category MAIN.

Against            Which items to evaluate when applying conditions:
                   Current item............The highlighted item only.
                   Marked items............All items you marked (t) with F7.
                   Items in section........All items in the current section.
                   Items in view...........All items in the current view.
                   All items...............All items in current Agenda file.

Apply actions      Which items to apply a category's actions to:
to                 New assignments only....Just those items newly assigned to
                                           the category, not items already
                                           assigned to category.
                   Old & new assignments...All items assigned to the category.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a category,   » Index

Show Match Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Search for         1 to 60 characters of text to search for in current file.
                   Can include control characters allowed in text conditions:
                   * ? ; , ~ ! \ ( ) ^ " " (example: Pat* matches Pat,
                   Patty, or Patricia).  Result is a show view of all items
                   that contain each word in this setting (words don't have to
                   be in same order).  To search for a specific phrase (where
                   word order matters), enclose phrase in parentheses.

Match on           Where to look for matching text:
                   Item text...........Search only the text of items.
                   Note text...........Search each item's note (but not the
                                       item text itself).
                   Both item & note....Search each item and its note.

Ignore case        Yes.................Match letters regardless of case.
                                       Example: Fred matches fred.
                   No..................Letters must be same case.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Show Schedule Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Date category      Existing date category by which to filter items for the
                   show view.  Default date category is When.

Section head       Existing category to use as show view's section head.
                   Select the category whose items you want to display in the
                   schedule.  The default section head is the same category
                   specified in the Date Category setting.

Date               The date that items in specified date category must have
                   in order to be displayed.  Press ALT-C (or F3) to select
                   from pop-up calendar or just type the date yourself.
                   Default is the current system date.

                   Examples: 11/12/90, Fri, today, today at 3:00pm, 2 weeks
                   from today.

Filter             (Optional)  Additional criteria you use to control which
                   items appear in the show view (items must meet this filter
                   criteria AND the Date Category criteria).

                   Specify standard or unindexed categories to display only
                   items assigned (or not assigned) to them.  Specify date
                   categories to display only items that are assigned (or not
                   assigned) to them and have a particular date/time value.
                   Specify numeric categories to display only the items that
                   are assigned (or not assigned) to them and have a
                   particular numeric value.  For example, to display only
                   those items assigned to standard categories Smith and Chan:

                     Filter:
                       Smith
                       Chan

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a category,   Enter dates & times,   » Index

Delete Show View Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Delete the         Yes.......Discard the current show view from the Agenda
existing show                file.  Because only 1 show view can exist at a
view?                        time, you must delete the current one in order
                             to perform another Utilities Show command.  (If
                             you want to keep the current show view, use the
                             view manager to rename it before performing
                             another Utilities Show command.)

                             Discarding a show view has no effect on anything
                             else in the file.

                   No........Cancel the Utilities Show command and keep the
                             current show view as is.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Empty Trash Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Empty the trash?   Yes.......Permanently delete all items that are currently
                             in the trash.  (The trash contains all items that
                             you've discarded in the current session by using
                             ALT-F4 or the Item Discard command.)

                             Caution:  You can't recover these items once you
                             empty them from the trash.

                   No........Cancel the Empty operation and leave the contents
                             of the trash unchanged.

                             Tip:  You can recover items from the trash by
                             using the Item Undisc command.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Launch Program Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Program to run     1 to 8 character name of the program to launch.  (Launching
                   suspends the current Agenda session and runs the specified
                   program.  You automatically return to Agenda when done with
                   the launched program.)

                   Enter a path if the program is stored in a directory other
                   than the current one (for example, c:\programs\prog1).  You
                   can specify the program's file extension (such as .COM) if
                   necessary (to distinguish between similarly named files
                   such as PROGRAM.COM and PROGRAM.BAT).

                   Caution:  Don't launch terminate-and-stay resident (TSR)
                   programs such as Lotus Metro or most network software.
                   Don't launch memory-resident DOS commands (such as
                   PRINT.COM) unless you load them before starting Agenda.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

New File Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Description        (Optional) 1 to 40 characters of text that describes this
                   Agenda file.

Password           (Optional) 1 to 12 character password for this Agenda file
                   that protects it from unauthorized use.  Agenda requires
                   you to specify this password whenever you try to retrieve
                   the file.  For security, the password doesn't appear when
                   you type it.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Create a file,   » Index

Use Backup File Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Opening backup     Yes.......Write over the specified Agenda file (on disk)
file (name.BG)               with the contents of its backup file.  Agenda
Replace existing             then retrieves the backup file and displays it on
(name.AG)                    the screen.

                             Caution:  Once you write over the original Agenda
                             file, you can't recover the erased info later.

                   No........Retrieve the backup file and display it on the
                             screen, but don't change the contents of the
                             original Agenda file.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Remove Column from Section(s) Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Remove column      Which occurrences of the current column to remove from the
from               view:

                   Current section only....Remove the column from the current
                                           section only.  Does not affect how
                                           the column is used in other
                                           sections of the view.

                   All sections in view....Remove the column from each section
                                           in which it appears.

                   In either case, the category used as the column head
                   remains in the category hierarchy after you remove the
                   column.  Also, assignments in the Agenda file are not
                   affected when you remove the column.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Remove Column from View Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Remove this        Yes.......Remove the current column from the view.  (The
column from                  category used as the column head remains in the
the view?                    category hierarchy after you remove the column.
                             Also, assignments in the Agenda file are not
                             affected when you remove the column.)

                   No........Cancel the remove request and keep the current
                             column as is in the view.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Turn off confirm mode,   » Index

When Date for Marked Items Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Set a when date    Yes.......Prepare to set the When date for every item in
for the marked               the file you've marked (t) with F7 (MARK).  Once
items?                       you select Yes, Agenda prompts you to specify
                             the When date for the marked items.

                             The When date is simply the date/time that an
                             item has in the When category.

                   No........Cancel the request to set a When date.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

When Date for Marked/Current Item(s) Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Set when date      Which item(s) you want to specify a When date for:
for
                   Current item.....Set the When date for the currently
                                    highlighted item only.

                   Marked items.....Set the When date for every item in the
                                    file that you've marked (t) with
                                    F7 (MARK).

                   Once you complete this setting, Agenda prompts you to
                   type the When date to use.  (The When date is simply the
                   date/time that an item has in the When category.)

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Search Current View Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Search for         1 to 60 characters of text to search for in current view.
                   Can include any of the punctuation and control characters
                   allowed in text conditions: * ? ; , ~ ! \ ( ) ^ " "
                   (example: Pat* matches Pat, Patty, or Patricia).

                   Agenda searches for the items that contain each word in
                   this setting (words don't have to be in same order).  To
                   search for a specific phrase (where word order matters),
                   enclose phrase in parentheses.  For example, to find the
                   text Wankel Rotary Engine, type: (Wankel Rotary Engine).

Match on           Where to look for matching text:

                   Item text...........Search only the text of items.
                   Note text...........Search each item's note (but not the
                                       item text itself).
                   Both item & note....Search each item and its note.

Direction          Which way to search:

                   Backward.......Search backward from the current highlight
                                  position to the beginning of the view.
                   Forward........Search forward from the current highlight
                                  position to the end of the view.
                   Search from
                   beginning......Search from the beginning of the view to the
                                  end.

Ignore case        Yes............Match letters regardless of case.
                                  Example: Fred matches fred.

                   No.............Letters must be the same case (uppercase or
                                  lowercase).

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Assign Item(s) Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Assign             Which item(s) you want to assign to a category:

                   Current item.....Assign only the currently highlighted
                                    item.

                   Marked items.....Assign every item in the file that you've
                                    marked (t) with F7 (MARK).

                   Once you complete this setting, Agenda prompts you to
                   specify the category to which the item(s) will be assigned.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Assign Marked Items Confirmation Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Assign the         Yes.......Prepare to assign every item in the file that
marked items to              you've marked (t) with F7 (MARK).  Once you
a category?                  select Yes, Agenda prompts you to specify the
                             category to which the marked items will be
                             assigned.

                   No........Cancel the request to make assignments.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Set Alarm Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Date category      An existing date category.  Agenda compares the item's
                   date/time in this category to the current system date/time.
                   When they match, Agenda rings the item's alarm.

                   The default date category is When.

Minutes before     How many minutes before the actual event (when the
                   category date/time matches the system date/time) Agenda is
                   to ring the alarm.  Type an integer number from 0 to 60.

                   The default is 5 minutes.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a category,   » Index

Set Marked Items Done Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Designate the      Yes.......Switch the done indicator (!!) on or off for every
marked items as              item in the file that you've marked (t) with
done?                        F7 (MARK).  Each marked item that isn't already
                             done is now set to done.  Each marked item that
                             is already set to done is switched to not done
                             (and its !! indicator is removed).

                             Once you designate an item done, the date/time of
                             its completion appears in the Done category.

                             Tip:  You can specify how Agenda is to process
                             done items by using the File Properties and
                             View Properties commands.

                   No........Cancel the request to set items to done (or not
                             done).

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Set Marked/Current Item(s) Done Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Set to done        Which item(s) you want to set to done (or not done):

                   Current item.....Only the currently highlighted item.

                   Marked items.....Every item in the file that you've
                                    marked (t) with F7 (MARK).

                   Once you complete this box, Agenda switches the done
                   indicator (!!) on or off for the item(s) you've specified.
                   Each item that isn't already done is now set to done.  Each
                   item that is already set to done is switched to not done
                   (and its !! indicator is removed).  Once you designate an
                   item done, the date/time of its completion appears in the
                   Done category.

                   Tip:  To specify how Agenda is to process done items, use
                   the File Properties and View Properties commands.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Discard Selection Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Discard            What to discard from the Agenda file:

                   Marked items.........Discard all items in file that you've
                                        marked (t) with F7 (MARK).  Does not
                                        affect currently highlighted category.
                                        Agenda places discarded items in the
                                        trash.  Tip: You can recover them
                                        later in the same Agenda session by
                                        using the Item Undisc command.

                   Current selection....Discard the currently highlighted
                                        category from the Agenda file.  Agenda
                                        warns you if the category has items,
                                        children, or conditions/actions that
                                        are affected by the Discard operation.
                                        Caution: You can't recover a category
                                        once you discard it.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Copy Selection Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Copy the marked    Yes......Copy every item in the file that you've marked (t)
items to another            with F7 (MARK).
section?
                            Once you complete this box, Agenda prompts for the
                            section to copy to.  Agenda automatically assigns
                            the copied item(s) to the category that heads the
                            target section.  Copied items remain assigned to
                            their original sections as well (unless you copy
                            from one mutually exclusive category to another).

                   No.......Cancel the copy request.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Copy Marked/Current Item(s) Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Copy               Which item(s) to copy to another section of current view:

                   Current item.....Copy only the currently highlighted item.

                   Marked items.....Copy every item in the file that you've
                                    marked (t) with F7 (MARK).

                   Once you complete this box, Agenda prompts for the section
                   to copy to. Agenda automatically assigns the copied item(s)
                   to the category that heads the target section. Copied items
                   remain assigned to their original sections as well (unless
                   you copy from one mutually exclusive category to another).

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Move Marked/Current Item(s) Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Move               Which item(s) to move to another section of current view:

                   Current item.....Move only the currently highlighted item.

                   Marked items.....Move every item in the file that you've
                                    marked (t) with F7 (MARK).

                   Once you complete this box, Agenda prompts for the section
                   to move to.  Agenda automatically breaks the assignment
                   between each moved item and the original section head, and
                   then assigns these items to the target section head.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Move Selection Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Move               What to move:

                   Marked items.........Move all items in file marked (t) with
                                        F7 (MARK).  Agenda prompts you for the
                                        section to move to.  It unassigns the
                                        items from original section head and
                                        assigns them to target section head.

                   Current selection....If highlight on section head: lets you
                                        change order of sections in view.

                                        If highlight on column head: lets you
                                        change order of columns in section.

                                        If highlight on column entry: lets you
                                        move the adjacent item to a different
                                        section.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Make Item Dependent Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Make the current   Yes.......Make the highlighted item dependent (&) on every
item dependent               item in the file that you've marked (t) with
on marked items?             F7 (MARK).  The marked items become prerequisites
                             of the highlighted item. (Prerequisites are items
                             that should be completed before the dependent
                             item is acted upon.)

                             Tip:  You can hide dependent items by using the
                             View Properties command.  You can display
                             dependency info by using the Utilities Show
                             command.

                   No........Cancel the request to make the current item
                             dependent.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Clear Dependencies Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Clear the          Yes.......Remove all dependencies (&) from the highlighted
existing                     item.  In other words, this item is no longer
dependencies?                dependent on any prerequisite items.

                             (Prerequisites are items that should be completed
                             before the dependent item is acted upon.)

                   No........Cancel the request to clear the item's
                             dependencies and keep them as is.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Manual File Reservation Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
File is set        Yes.......Try to get a reservation for the current Agenda
to manual                    file.  While you have a reservation for this
reservation. Get             file, you can read it and update it.  Other
the reservation?             network users can't update the file, but they can
                             read it.

                             Tip:  You can change the default reservation
                             status of the file (to automatically try to get a
                             reservation) with the File Properties command.

                   No........Don't get a reservation for the file.  This means
                             you can read it but not update it.

                             Tip:  If you want to try to get a reservation for
                             this file later in the session, use the File
                             Maintenance Reservation command.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Set Time Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Enter time         The hour and minute you want to specify (example: 9:17am).
                   To change the time:

                     Press SPACEBAR to switch the highlight between hours and
                      minutes.

                     Press GREY + (on the numeric keypad) to increase the
                      hour or minute.

                     Press GREY - to decrease the hour or minute.

                   Or you can simply type the new time yourself.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Enter dates & times,   » Index

Read Only File Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Options            The file you're using is open in Read-Only mode (without a
                   reservation), so you can't save your changes to it. Specify
                   what to do with the changes you've made:
                   Save to another file....Save the modified file under a
                                           different file name.
                   Abandon changes.........Discard all changes you've made to
                                           the current Agenda file.
                   Get reservation.........Try to get the reservation for the
                                           current Agenda file. If you're able
                                           to get the reservation, you can
                                           save your changes to this file.

File name          (Only if Options is set to Save To Another File)  1 to 8
                   character name of a different Agenda file (new or existing)
                   to save.  Specify a path to save file in a directory other
                   than current one (for example, c:\info\new).  Don't specify
                   file extension (Agenda adds .AG when storing file in DOS).

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a file,   » Index

Print Preview: Main Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Page               Display the next or previous page of the document, or go
                   to any page

Content/           Toggle between displaying the formatted contents of the
Full-page          document for proofreading (Content) or the general layout
                   of entire pages (Full-page)

Reverse/           Toggle between reverse-video screen display (Reverse) and
Normal             normal screen display (Normal) of preview pages

Quit               Leave Preview mode and return to your previous activity --
                   view, note, macro editor, or category manager (ALT-Q)

SEE ALSO

About printing,   About preview mode,   Use a menu,   » Index

Print Preview: Page Command Menu

COMMAND            PURPOSE
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Next               Display the next page of the document (ENTER or CTRL-PGDN
                   or ALT-N)

                   Note: If you use Next while on last page, Agenda leaves
                   Preview mode and returns you to your last activity
                   (view, note, macro editor, or category manager)

Previous           Display the previous page of the document (CTRL-PGUP or
                   ALT-P)

Goto               Specify a particular page of the document to display
                   (ALT-F5)

SEE ALSO

About printing,   About preview mode,   Use a menu,   » Index

Goto Page Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Page number        The number of the formatted document page you want to
                   display.  Example: to preview the tenth page of the
                   document, type 10.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   About printing,   About preview mode,   » Index

Print Setup Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Print preview      The type of graphics display adapter your computer has (if
display driver     any).  Agenda needs this adapter to perform Print Preview
                   command.  If your computer has no graphics display adapter,
                   select None (this means you can't use Print Preview).

                   Once you select an adapter, Agenda may prompt you to fill
                   in additional settings.  For info on these settings, see
                   the Setting Up Agenda manual.

Primary/           The device(s) Agenda uses to print.  You can select from
Secondary          the list of printers you chose during installation.  If you
printer            have only one printer, specify it in the Primary Printer
                   setting and specify None in Secondary Printer.

                   Once you select a printer, Agenda may prompt you to fill
                   in additional settings.  For info on these settings, see
                   the Setting Up Agenda manual.

Port               The communications port through which Agenda sends info
                   to the printer.  To print to a parallel port, select one of
                   these: PRN (default), LPT1, LPT2, LPT3.  To print to a
                   serial port, select one of these: COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4.

Portrait           Displays the list of fonts (typefaces and typeface sizes)
font list          available for portrait-oriented printing on the specified
                   printer.  Use this list to modify one or more of the fonts.
                   (To tell Agenda which of these fonts to use for printing
                   different kinds of info, use Print Layout command.)

Landscape          (Only if your printer supports it)  Displays the list of
font list          fonts available for landscape-oriented printing on the
                   specified printer.  Works same way as Portrait font list.

                   If printer supports both portrait and landscape, use
                   Print Layout command to specify which orientation to use.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   About printing,   Set up printers,   » Index

Portrait/Landscape Font List

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Font #             Identifies each of the 20 possible font definitions for
                   your printer. You can't edit the Font # column, but you can
                   change Font Names (see below).  Note: Agenda keeps separate
                   portrait and/or landscape definitions for each printer you
                   use (because different printers support different fonts).

Font name          1 to 15 character name for a particular font definition.
                   You can change default font names to be more descriptive
                   (example: you might change "Font 8" to "Big Font").

Typeface           The typeface that a particular font definition is to use
                   (such as Times Roman or Courier).  Press F3 (CHOICES) to
                   choose from the list of typefaces your printer supports.

Size               The typeface size that a particular font definition is to
                   use (such as 12.0pt). Press F3 (CHOICES) to choose from the
                   list of sizes your printer supports.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   About printing,   Set up printers,   » Index

Print Preview Mode

WHAT YOU      In Preview mode, Agenda always displays one of these 2 screens:
SEE
               The Full-page screen shows the general layout of entire pages
                from the formatted document.  You can move the selector box to
                see a magnified image of different portions of the page.

               The Content screen shows you the formatted contents of the
                document (one-third of a page at a time) for proofreading.

BASIC         USE                   IF YOU WANT TO
SKILLS        --------------------  ------------------------------------------
              F10 Content           Switch from Full-page to Content screen
              F10 Full-page         Switch from Content to Full-page screen

              F10 Reverse           Display screen in reverse video
              F10 Normal            Display screen in normal video

              ALT-Q or F10 Quit     Leave Preview mode, return to prior work

PAGING        USE                   IF YOU WANT TO
KEYS          --------------------  ------------------------------------------
              ENTER or ALT-N or     Display the next page of the document (if
              CTRL-PGDN or          you're on the last page, this quits
              F10 Page Next         Preview mode)

              ALT-P or CTRL-PGUP    Display the previous page of the document
              or F10 Page Previous

              ALT-F5 or             Specify a particular page to display
              F10 Page Goto

              The following paging keys work on the Content screen only (not
              on the Full-page screen):

              ,                   Move up/down one line

              PGUP, PGDN            Move up/down one-third of a page

SELECTOR      These keys control the selector box on the Full-page screen:
BOX KEYS
              PRESS                 IF YOU WANT TO
              --------------------  ------------------------------------------
              ,                   Move up/down 7 lines
              ,                   Move left/right 20 characters

              SHIFT-, SHIFT-      Move up/down one pixel
              SHIFT-, SHIFT-      Move left/right one pixel

              HOME                  Move to top left corner of page
              END                   Move to bottom right corner of page

              GREY +                Expand selector box over a wider area of
                                    the page (and decrease the size of the
                                    text in magnifier box)
              GREY -                Shrink selector box to a smaller area of
                                    the page (and increase the size of the
                                    text in magnifier box)

SEE ALSO

Prepare to preview,   About printing,   » Index

Delete Note/Macro Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Delete the         Yes.......Clear the existing text from the current note or
existing                     macro when Agenda attaches the external file.
note/macro?                  Once you select Yes, Agenda prompts you for the
                             file to attach.  (Agenda doesn't clear the
                             existing note/macro until you actually specify a
                             file.)

                             Caution:  Once you delete the text from a
                             note/macro, you can't recover it (unless the text
                             is stored in an external file that you later
                             import or attach).

                   No........Cancel the attach operation and keep the current
                             note/macro as is.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   External macro file,   External note file,   » Index

Attach External Note/Macro File Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
File name          1 to 8 character name of the text file to attach to the
                   current note or macro.  Once you attach this text file,
                   it becomes the source (dynamically read and updated) of
                   the note/macro.

                   If the file has an extension, specify it.  Specify a path
                   if the file isn't stored in the current directory.  For
                   example, to attach the file named SAMPLE that has the
                   extension TXT and is stored on the C drive in the NOTES
                   directory, type:

                      c:\notes\sample.txt

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a file,   » Index

Erase External Note/Macro File Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Delete the         Yes.......Erase from disk the external file that is
note/macro file              currently attached to the note or macro.  Agenda
from the disk?               also automatically clears the note/macro and
                             detaches this external file name from it.

                             Caution:  Once you delete an external file from
                             disk, you can't recover it.

                   No........Cancel the operation and keep the external file
                             as is.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   External macro file,   External note file,   » Index

Import File into Note/Macro Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
File name          1 to 8 character name of text file whose contents you want
                   to copy into current note or macro.  Agenda inserts the
                   imported text at cursor position.  Caution: If you're in
                   Overwrite mode, the imported text replaces existing text
                   that appears after the cursor position.

                   If file has an extension, specify it.  Specify a path if
                   file isn't stored in current directory (for example,
                   c:\notes\sample.txt).

Strip carriage     Yes....Remove single carriage returns from imported text
returns                   (wrap text to line length of 79). Keep strings of 2
                          or more carriage returns.

                   No.....Don't strip carriage returns (keep original text
                          formatting, except wrap any lines longer than 79).

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a file,   » Index

Export File from Note/Macro Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
File name          1 to 8 character name of text file into which you want to
                   copy text from the current note or macro.  If you've marked
                   text with F7 (MARK), Agenda exports just that text.
                   Otherwise, it exports all of the text from the note/macro.

                   You can optionally include a 3 character file extension.
                   (For macro files, Agenda uses the default MAC if you don't
                   specify an extension).  Specify a path if you want to
                   save the file in a directory other than current one.  For
                   example, to export text to file named SAMPLE that has the
                   extension TXT and is stored on the C drive in the NOTES
                   directory, type:

                      c:\notes\sample.txt

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a file,   » Index

Append/Replace Export File Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
File already       (Only if the export file you specified is already stored on
exists             disk)

                   Replace.....Replace the entire contents of this text file
                               with the exported info from the current
                               note/macro.

                               Caution:  Once you replace the contents of the
                               text file, you can't recover that info.

                   Append......Keep the current contents of this text file and
                               just add the newly exported info from the
                               note/macro to the end of it.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Clear Note/Macro Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Clear all text     Yes.......Delete all of the text from the current note or
from the                     macro.  If the note/macro text comes from an
note/macro?                  attached file, Agenda deletes the file's contents
                             but still keeps the empty file attached to the
                             note/macro.  (To detach this file, use the File
                             Detach command.  To detach it and erase it from
                             the disk, use the File Erase command.)

                             Caution:  Once you clear the text from a
                             note/macro, you can't recover it (unless you
                             press ESC instead of F5 to leave the note/macro).

                   No........Cancel the Clear command and keep the current
                             note/macro as is.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   External macro file,   External note file,   » Index

Search & Replace in Note/Macro Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Search for         1 to 25 characters of text to search for or replace in the
                   current note or macro.

Replace text       Yes........Replace occurrences of the Search For text with
                              the text you specify in Replace With setting.
                   No.........Just find occurrences of the Search For text.
                              Don't replace them.  Tip: Once you find first
                              occurrence, press ALT-S to find subsequent ones.

Replace with       (Only if Replace Text is set to Yes)  1 to 25 characters of
                   text that is to replace occurrences of the Search For text
                   in this note/macro.

Direction          Backward...Search backward from the highlight to the
                              beginning of the note/macro.
                   Forward....Search forward from the highlight to the end of
                              the note/macro.

Ignore case        Yes....Match letters regardless of case.  Example: Fred
                          matches fred.
                   No.....Letters must be the same case (uppercase or
                          lowercase) in order to match.

Global             (Only if Replace Text is set to Yes)
replacement        Yes....Replace every occurrence of the Search For text with
                          the Replace With text.
                   No.....Replace only the next occurrence of Search For text
                          with Replace With text.  Tip: Press ALT-S to replace
                          each subsequent occurrence one at a time.

Confirm            (Only if Replace Text is set to Yes)
replacement        Yes....Agenda prompts you to confirm each replacement.
                   No.....Agenda replaces occurrences without asking you for
                          confirmation.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Replace Note/Macro Text Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Replace the        Yes.......Replace the highlighted occurrence of the text
current                      you're searching for with the replacement text
selection?                   you specified.

                             Tip:  Even after you replace occurrences you can
                             decide not to save these changes to the note or
                             macro.  If you press ESC (instead of F5) to leave
                             the note/macro, Agenda cancels all changes you've
                             made.

                   No........Don't replace this occurrence.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Make New Item Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Make new item      What portion of the note to move to the current view and
                   make into a new item (caution: Agenda removes this text
                   from the note):

                   Word.........Only the word that the cursor is on.  If the
                                cursor is between 2 words, Agenda uses the one
                                before the cursor.
                   Line.........All text from the line that the cursor is on.
                   All text.....All of the text in the note.

                   Tip:  If you want to keep the specified text in the note
                   after making it into a new item, press ESC (instead of F5)
                   to leave the note.

                   Agenda assigns the new item to current section of view.  If
                   you specify more than 350 characters of text, Agenda makes
                   a note for the new item to hold the extra characters.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Discard Copied Items Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Discard items      Yes.......Copy the item & note text of all marked items (t)
after copy?                  into the current note, then discard those items
                             from the file.  Agenda places all discarded items
                             in the trash.

                             Tip:  You can recover the discarded items later
                             in the same Agenda session by using the Item
                             Undisc command.

                   No........Copy all marked items into the current note, but
                             don't discard them.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Append to Item/Category Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Append to item     What portion of the note to move to the current view and
                   insert at the end of the current item or category name
                   (caution: Agenda removes this text from the note):

                   Word.........Only the word that the cursor is on.  If the
                                cursor is between 2 words, Agenda uses the one
                                before the cursor.
                   Line.........All text from the line that the cursor is on.
                   All text.....All of the text in the note.

                   Tip:  If you want to keep the specified text in the note
                   after appending it to the current item or category name,
                   press ESC (instead of F5) to leave the note.

                   If the appended text causes the item or category name to
                   exceed its size limit (350 characters for item, 69 for
                   category), the extra characters remain in the note.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Discard Note/Macro Changes Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Discard            Yes.......Leave the current note or macro and cancel the
changes?                     changes you've just made to it.  This restores
                             the text of the note/macro to the way it was when
                             you started editing.

                             Caution:  Operations you've performed with the
                             File command are not cancelled (whether you
                             select Yes or No).

                   No........Leave the note/macro and save the changes you've
                             made to it.

SEE ALSO

Macro editor,   Fill in a box,   Note editor,   » Index

Note/Macro File Not Found Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Note file was      (Only if current note or macro has an external file name
not found.         attached to it, but the file doesn't exist on disk)
Create a file?
                   Yes.......Create a new external text file using the name
                             currently specified by the File Attach command.
                             Agenda then takes you to the note/macro and opens
                             this file so you can edit it.

                             Important:  Choose Yes even if you want to detach
                             the current file name (otherwise, Agenda won't
                             let you work with this note/macro).  Then use the
                             File Detach command.

                   No........Don't create the external file. This also cancels
                             your request to go to the current note/macro.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   External macro file,   External note file,   » Index

Clear Conditions/Actions Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Clear              Which portions of current category's definition to erase:

                   Condition & action....Erase all conditions and actions that
                                         are defined for this category.

                   Condition.............Erase all conditions defined for this
                                         category but keep its actions.

                   Action................Erase all actions defined for this
                                         category but keep its conditions.

                   Caution:  Once you clear conditions or actions you can't
                   recover them.

                   Tip:  If the category has multiple conditions or actions
                   and you want to clear a particular one, use the Category
                   Properties command instead.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Category properties,   » Index

Clear Conditions Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Clear the          Yes.......Erase all conditions defined for the current
condition?                   category.

                             Caution:  Once you clear these conditions you
                             can't recover them.

                             Tip:  If the category has multiple conditions
                             and you want to clear a particular one, use the
                             Category Properties command instead.

                   No........Cancel the clear request and keep the conditions.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Clear Actions Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Clear the          Yes.......Erase all actions defined for the current
action?                      category.

                             Caution:  Once you clear these actions you can't
                             recover them.

                             Tip:  If the category has multiple actions and
                             you want to clear a particular one, use the
                             Category Properties command instead.

                   No........Cancel the clear request and keep the actions.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Copy Conditions/Actions Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Copy               Which portions of the source category's definition to copy
                   to the target category:

                   Condition & action....Erase all existing conditions and
                                         actions from the target category.
                                         Then copy all conditions and actions
                                         from the source category.

                   Condition.............Erase all existing conditions from
                                         the target category (but keep its
                                         actions).  Then copy all conditions
                                         from the source category.

                   Action................Erase all existing actions from the
                                         target category (but keep its
                                         conditions).  Then copy all actions
                                         from the source category.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Sort Categories Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Sort these         Yes.......Sort the child categories of the current category
categories?                  in alphabetical order.  If the current category
                             has no children, no sorting occurs.

                             Tip:  To sort the top level of categories in the
                             hierarchy, highlight MAIN as the current category
                             before you press ALT-F5 (SORT).

                   No........Cancel the sort request and keep the categories
                             in their current order.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Turn off confirm mode,   » Index

Promote Category Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Promote the        Yes.......Promote the current category by moving it up one
category?                    level in the category hierarchy.  For example,
                             if you promote the category called Finance:

                             BEFORE PROMOTING            AFTER PROMOTING
                                Administration              Administration
                                  Bob                         Bob
                                  Fred                        Fred
                                  Finance                   Finance
                                  Jane                        Jane

                             Note:  If you promote a parent category, Agenda
                             automatically promotes its children (so they
                             remain one level below the parent).

                   No........Cancel the promote request and keep the category
                             hierarchy as is.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Turn off confirm mode,   » Index

Demote Category Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Demote the         Yes.......Demote the current category by moving it down one
category?                    level in the category hierarchy.  For example,
                             if you demote the category called Louise:

                             BEFORE DEMOTING             AFTER DEMOTING
                                Marketing                   Marketing
                                  Bob                         Bob
                                  Ed                          Ed
                                Louise                        Louise
                                Finance                     Finance
                                  Jane                        Jane
                                  Joan                        Joan

                   No........Cancel the demote request and keep the category
                             hierarchy as is.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Turn off confirm mode,   » Index

Promotion Conflict (with Assignments) Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Items in current   This message means that your request to promote the current
category are also  category would cause one or more items to be assigned to
assigned to new    both a parent and child category (which is not allowed).
child category
                   Example:  The item "Call Fred Quimby" is assigned to the
                   categories Ed and Louise.  If you try to promote Ed, you
                   get this message because the item would then be invalidly
                   assigned to a parent (Ed) and its child (Louise):

                   BEFORE PROMOTING            IF YOU PROMOTE ED
                      Marketing                   Marketing
                        Bob                         Bob
                        Ed                        Ed
                        Louise                      Louise
                      Finance                     Finance
                        Jane                        Jane
                        Joan                        Joan

Process            What to do with the items that would otherwise be invalidly
conflicting        assigned to both the parent and child:
item(s) by
                   Removing from current
                   category................Keep these items assigned to the
                                           new children but not the new parent
                                           (the category you're promoting).
                   Removing from
                   conflicting category....Keep these items assigned to new
                                           parent but not its new children.
                   Moving to new
                   category................Unassign these items from both the
                                           new parent and its children.  Then
                                           assign them to another category.

New category       (If you select Moving To New Category)  New or existing
for item(s)        category to which Agenda assigns all conflicting items.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a category,   » Index

Promotion Conflict (with Exclusivity) Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Items in current   This message means that your requested action would cause
category family    items to be assigned to one or more mutually exclusive
are also assigned  categories (which is not allowed).
to new sibling
categories         Example:  The categories Marketing and Finance are mutually
                   exclusive.  Bob and Ed are children of Marketing and both
                   have the item "Call Fred Quimby" assigned to them.  If you
                   promote Ed, Agenda displays the conflict message.  That's
                   because the item would be assigned to both Ed (which
                   becomes mutually exclusive) and Marketing (which inherits
                   the item assignment from its child, Bob):

                   BEFORE PROMOTING            IF YOU PROMOTE ED
                     +Marketing                  +Marketing
                     |  Bob                      |  Bob
                     |  Ed                       +Ed
                     +Finance                    +Finance

Process            What to do with the items that would otherwise be invalidly
conflicting        assigned to mutually exclusive categories:
item(s) by
                   Removing from current
                   category................Unassign these items from the new
                                           mutually exclusive category (the
                                           category you're promoting).
                   Removing from
                   conflicting category....Unassign these items from original
                                           mutually exclusive category.
                   Moving to new
                   category................Unassign these items from both
                                           mutually exclusive categories. Then
                                           assign them to another category.

New category       (If you select Moving To New Category)  New or existing
for item(s)        category to which Agenda assigns all conflicting items.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a category,   Category manager,   » Index

Exclusive Children Conflict Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Item(s) are        You have requested that the children of the current parent
assigned to more   category be made mutually exclusive (by using the Exclusive
than one category  Children setting in the Category Properties box).  But the
in this family     file currently contains at least one item that is assigned
                   to 2 or more of these children (which is not allowed when
                   exclusivity is in effect).

                   Example:  The categories Bob and Ed are children of the
                   Marketing category and both Bob and Ed have the item "Call
                   Fred Quimby" assigned to them:

                      Marketing
                        Bob
                        Ed

                   If you then specify that Marketing is to have Exclusive
                   Children, Agenda displays the conflict message.

Assign             Where to reassign items that would otherwise be invalidly
conflicting        assigned to the mutually exclusive child categories:
item(s) to
                   Parent category.........Unassign these items from the child
                                           categories and assign them to the
                                           parent category.

                   Existing category.......Keep these items assigned to only
                                           the child that is closest to the
                                           parent in the hierarchy.

                   New category............Unassign these items from the child
                                           categories and assign them to a new
                                           category (see the setting below).

New category       (If you select New Category)  New or existing category to
for item(s)        which Agenda assigns all conflicting items.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a category,   Category manager,   » Index

Demotion Conflict Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Items in current   This message means that your request to demote the current
category are also  category would cause one or more items to be assigned to
assigned to new    both a parent and child category (which is not allowed).
parent category
                   Example:  The item "Call Fred Quimby" is assigned to the
                   categories Ed and Louise.  If you demote Louise, you get
                   this message because the item would then be invalidly
                   assigned to a parent (Ed) and its child (Louise):

                   BEFORE DEMOTING             IF YOU DEMOTE LOUISE
                      Marketing                   Marketing
                        Bob                         Bob
                        Ed                          Ed
                        Louise                        Louise
                      Finance                     Finance
                        Jane                        Jane
                        Joan                        Joan

Process            What to do with the items that would otherwise be invalidly
conflicting        assigned to both the parent and child:
item(s) by
                   Removing from current
                   category................Keep these items assigned to the
                                           new parent but not the new child
                                           (the category you're demoting).
                   Removing from
                   conflicting category....Keep these items assigned to the
                                           new child but not its new parent.
                   Moving to new
                   category................Unassign these items from both the
                                           new parent and its child.  Then
                                           assign them to another category.

New category       (If you select Moving To New Category)  New or existing
for item(s)        category to which Agenda assigns all conflicting items.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a category,   » Index

Delete Macro Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Delete the         Yes.......Erase the entire contents of the current macro
existing macro?              and delete its name from the macro manager list.

                             If the macro is attached to an external file,
                             Agenda detaches that file before deleting the
                             macro.  The contents of the external file are not
                             affected.

                             Caution:  Once you delete a macro, you can't
                             recover it (unless the contents are stored in an
                             external file that you later Import or attach
                             with the File command).

                   No........Cancel the Delete request and keep the current
                             macro as is.

SEE ALSO

Macro editor,   Fill in a box,   » Index

Macro Properties Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Name               The name of current macro.  You can't change this setting.
                   Tip:  To change the macro name, use the Contents setting
                   to display the macro's contents.  Then edit the macro name
                   that appears on the first line between { and }.  The name
                   can be 1 to 35 characters long.  Name the macro AUTOEXEC if
                   you want it to run whenever you open the Agenda file.

Contents           (Only if Macro Is Protected is set to No)  Displays the
                   macro's contents so you can read or edit it.

Macro file         (Optional) 1 to 8 character name of a separate text file to
                   attach as the source of this macro's contents. If you don't
                   specify an extension, Agenda uses the default .MAC. Specify
                   a path if the file isn't in current directory (example:
                   c:\info\sample.mac).  When you display the macro, Agenda
                   retrieves the contents from this file.  When you edit the
                   macro, Agenda saves the changes to this file.

Attach to key      (Optional)  Name of a key that users can press to run this
                   macro.  Most keys (except for letters, numbers) must be
                   enclosed between { and }. You can specify almost any key on
                   keyboard, including: function keys {F4}, CTRL keys {CtlA},
                   ALT keys {AltF5}, SHIFT keys {ShfF2}, special keys {INS}.
                   Note: You can't attach a macro to ALT-F1, ALT-F3, or ALT-Z.

                   To specify a key in this setting, use one of these methods:

                    Type the key name yourself as shown in the examples
                     above.  Make sure you enclose it in braces (if required).

                    Or, press ALT = to have Agenda capture the key name for
                     you automatically.  Then press the actual key you want
                     Agenda to capture (such as F4 or CTRL-A).

Macro can be       The parts of Agenda (View, Note, Category Manager) in which
run from           users can run this macro. If you attach the macro to a key,
                   Agenda also lets you specify whether users can run it from
                   Everywhere Else (such as from dialog boxes).

                   Yes.....Let users run the macro from this particular part
                           of Agenda.  The macro name appears in the macro
                           manager list when users press ALT-F3 (MACRO) while
                           in this part of Agenda.
                   No......Prevent users from running the macro from this part
                           of Agenda and don't list the macro name in the
                           macro manager while here.  Tip: As long as the file
                           isn't sealed, users can press ALT-F7 (DISPLAY) in
                           macro manager to see names of hidden () macros.

                   Note:  Other macros can call this macro from any part of
                   Agenda, regardless of what you specify in these settings.

Macro is           Yes.....Prevent users from displaying and editing this
protected                  macro's contents, or from changing the macro's
                           properties.

                   No......Allow users to display the contents of this macro,
                           edit it, and change its properties.

Macro can          Yes.....Allow this macro to perform any operation on the
override                   Agenda file, regardless of the view, category,
protection                 or macro protection that is currently in effect.
                           (This enables you to create applications that
                           restrict what users can do without restricting
                           your macros.)

                   No......Restrict what macros can do according to the view,
                           category, or macro protection currently in effect.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a file,   » Index

Append/Replace Macro Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Macro already      (Only if the highlight is on a non-empty macro when you
exists             press F7 (LEARN) to turn on Learn mode and start recording
                   keystrokes)

                   Replace.....Replace the entire contents of this macro
                               (except its name) with the keystrokes you're
                               about to record.

                               Caution:  Once you replace the contents of the
                               macro, you can't recover that info.

                   Append......Keep the current contents of this macro and
                               just add the newly recorded keystrokes to the
                               end of it.

                   Important:  When you're finished recording keystrokes and
                   want to turn off Learn mode, press ALT-F3 (MACRO).

SEE ALSO

Macro manager,   Fill in a box,   » Index

Macro Input Box

PURPOSE       The Macro Input box is displayed by the macro you're currently
              running to prompt you for information.

STEPS         1. Type the information that the box prompts for.

                 If it prompts for a category or file name, you can optionally
                 press F3 (CHOICES) to select from a list.

              2. Press ENTER to complete the box (or ESC to quit the box and
                 cancel what you've entered).

FOR MORE      If you need to know more about this box or what you can enter
HELP          in it, consult the developer of the macro you're running.

TECHNICAL     The Macro Input Box that the macro currently displays is the
NOTE          result of one of these macro commands: {INPUTCAT}, {INPUTFILE},
              or {INPUTTEXT}.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Macro Information Box

PURPOSE       This box is displayed by the macro you're currently running
              to provide you with information.

STEPS         1. Use any of these keys to scroll through the info in the box:

                 PRESS              TO SCROLL
                 -----------------  ------------------------------------------
                 ,                Up or down one line

                 PGUP, PGDN         Up or down one page

                 HOME, END          To the beginning or end of the info

              2. Press ENTER to leave the box when you're done reading.

FOR MORE      If you need to know more about this box or the info in it,
HELP          consult the developer of the macro you're running.

TECHNICAL     The information box that the macro currently displays is the
NOTE          result of the {LARGEBOX} macro command.

Horizontal Macro Menu

PURPOSE       This menu is displayed by the macro you're currently running
              to let you select a command.

SELECT A      To select a command from the menu, use one of these methods:
COMMAND
                Press the first letter of the command.

                Or, use , , HOME, and END to highlight the command and
                 press ENTER.

QUIT THE      To leave the menu without selecting a command, press ESC.
MENU

FOR MORE      If you need to know more about this menu, consult the developer
HELP          of the macro you're running.

TECHNICAL     The horizontal menu that the macro currently displays is the
NOTE          result of the {LOTUSMENU} macro command.

Vertical Macro Menu

PURPOSE       This menu is displayed by the macro you're currently running
              to let you select a command.

SELECT A      To select a command from the menu, use one of these methods:
COMMAND
                Type the first letter(s) of the command until Agenda
                 highlights it.  Then press ENTER.

                Or, use , , PGUP, PGDN, HOME, and END to highlight the
                 command and press ENTER.

QUIT THE      To leave the menu without selecting a command, press ESC.
MENU

FOR MORE      If you need to know more about this menu, consult the developer
HELP          of the macro you're running.

TECHNICAL     The vertical menu that the macro currently displays is the
NOTE          result of the {ROLLMENU} macro command.

Edit Mode: Copy Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
What to copy       What portion of the current text to copy to another place:

                   Word.......Only the word that cursor is on.  If cursor is
                              between 2 words, Agenda uses word before cursor.

                   Line.......The entire line that cursor is on.

                   All text...All of the current text.

                   To insert the copied text somewhere, move cursor to target
                   location and press F2 (PASTE).  You can repeat the paste
                   step if you want to copy the text to more than one place.

                   Tip:  Another way to copy is to use F7 (MARK) to mark the
                   text to copy before you press F3 (COPY).  If you do, Agenda
                   copies the marked text and doesn't display the Copy Box.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Edit mode,   » Index

Edit Mode: Cut Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
What to cut        What portion of the current text to remove from its present
                   location and insert elsewhere:

                   Word.......Only the word that cursor is on.  If cursor is
                              between 2 words, Agenda uses word before cursor.

                   Line.......The entire line that cursor is on.

                   All text...All of the current text.

                   To insert the cut text somewhere, move cursor to target
                   location and press F2 (PASTE).  You can repeat the paste
                   step if you want to insert the text in more than one place.

                   Tip:  Another way to cut is to use F7 (MARK) to mark the
                   text to cut before you press F4 (CUT).  If you do, Agenda
                   cuts the marked text and doesn't display the Cut Box.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Edit mode,   » Index

Edit Mode: Marker Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Printer            Print device currently specified under Print Layout
                   command. (You can't change this setting in the Marker Box.)

Orientation        Orientation of printed pages currently specified under
                   Print Layout command.  (You can't change this setting in
                   the Marker Box.)

Current            The attributes (such as bold, italic) and font (such as
attribute/font     Times Roman 12.0pt) currently in effect for the text that
                   the cursor is on.  If current text doesn't have attribute
                   or font markers, Agenda uses the attributes and font from
                   the Print Layout command.

                   To change the current attribute or font, use the Attribute
                   and Font settings below.  (Note: These settings only affect
                   printed output, not how text appears on screen.)

Attribute          Which attributes to use when printing current text (from
                   this marker to next one).  Select one or more of these
                   attributes: Normal, Bold, Italic, Underscore Words,
                   Underscore All, Double Underscore Words, Double Underscore
                   All, Subscript, Superscript, Strikethrough, Small Caps
                   (Agenda won't let you pick conflicting combinations).  Or,
                   select None to remove the current attribute marker.

                   A t appears on screen to show each attribute marker.  (Use
                   Utilities Customize command to change how markers appear.)

                   Note:  See your printer manual to find out which attributes
                   your printer supports.

                   Tip:  Before pressing F6 (MARKER) to insert an attribute
                   marker, you can optionally press F7 (MARK) to highlight a
                   specific region of text to which the marker applies.

Font               Which font to use when printing current text (from this
                   marker to next one).  Press F3 (CHOICES) to select from a
                   list of the available fonts for your primary or secondary
                   printer (depending on which is specified under the Print
                   Layout command).  Or, select None to remove the current
                   font marker.

                   A t appears on screen to show each font marker.  (Use
                   Utilities Customize command to change how markers appear.)

                   Note:  You can specify only 1 font for a particular region
                   of text.  If you want to change which fonts are available
                   for your printers, use the Print Setup command.

                   Tip:  Before pressing F6 (MARKER) to insert a font marker,
                   you can optionally press F7 (MARK) to highlight a specific
                   region of text to which the marker applies.

Special            Info that Agenda inserts at this place in the text when
                   printing. For each marker, select 1 of these kinds of info:
                   Date............Current system date when file is printed.
                   Description.....Text that describes current Agenda file.
                   File name.......Name of current Agenda file.
                   Page break......Start printing a new page.  (Not allowed in
                                   Header/Footer text.)
                   Page number.....Number of current printed page.  (Not
                                   allowed in item or note text.)
                   Path name.......Path of current Agenda file.
                   Printer code....A control sequence you enter to control the
                                   printer.  (See Sequence setting.)
                   Time............Current system time when file is printed.
                   View name.......Name of the current (or most recent) view.
                   None............Remove this special marker.
                   A t appears on screen to show each special marker.  (Use
                   Utilities Customize command to change how markers appear.)

Sequence           (Only if Special is set to Printer Code)  1 to 24 character
                   control sequence that tells your printer to perform one or
                   more specific functions (such as to change colors for color
                   printing).  See your printer manual to learn which control
                   sequences to use for your printer.

                   For any character in the sequence, you can type \
                   (BACKSLASH) followed by the decimal ASCII code for that
                   character.  For instance, to specify the ESC character,
                   type \27.

                   Here's an example of the sequence you'd type to make an
                   Epson FX-86e(TM) print in Condensed mode:

                     \27\15

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   About printing,   Edit mode,   » Index

Delete Marker Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Delete the         Yes.......Clear this attribute, font, or special marker
marker?                      from the text.

                             If you clear an attribute or font marker, the
                             current text uses the attributes/font of the
                             preceding marker.  If there isn't a preceding
                             marker, it uses the attributes/font specified
                             under the Print Layout command.

                             Tip:  To look at this marker before you delete
                             it, or to replace it with another marker, press
                             F6 (MARKER) while in Edit mode.  (In Edit mode,
                             Agenda also displays info about the current font
                             and attribute marker on line 2 of the screen.)

                   No........Cancel the operation and keep this marker as is.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Make Category Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Parent for new     Category that is to be the parent of the newly-made
category           category.  (The newly-made category will be a child of
                   this parent in the category hierarchy.)  You can specify
                   either a new or existing category as the parent.

                   Note:  The name of the new (child) category comes from the
                   text you were editing when you pressed ALT-F2 (MAKECAT).
                   If you marked a region of text with F7 (MARK) before
                   pressing ALT-F2, Agenda uses the marked text as the new
                   name.  Otherwise, Agenda uses the current word from the
                   text (if the cursor is between words, Agenda uses the
                   previous word).

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a category,   » Index

Edit Mode: Delete Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
What to delete     What portion of the current text to erase:

                   Word.......Only the word that cursor is on.  If cursor is
                              between 2 words, Agenda uses word before cursor.

                   Line.......The entire line that cursor is on.

                   All text...All of the current text.

                   Caution:  Once you delete text you can't recover it.

                   Tip:  Another way to delete is to use F7 (MARK) to mark the
                   text to delete before you press ALT-F4 (DELETE). If you do,
                   Agenda erases the marked text and doesn't display the
                   Delete Box.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Edit mode,   » Index

Damaged File Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
The current file   This Agenda file has become corrupted (probably due to a
is damaged. The    power loss/surge while it was being saved) and can't be
file will be       used anymore.  If you want to recover info from this file,
closed to avoid    select Yes in the setting below.  If you don't care about
further damage.    recovering the file's contents, select No.

Save changes to    Yes.......Copy the contents of the damaged file to a new
another file?                file name.  You can then process this new file
                             with the DB2STF utility program to recover the
                             items, categories, notes, and certain other info
                             from the file.  See Appendix I in the User's
                             Guide for further instructions.
                   No........Don't make a copy of the damaged file.

Filename           1 to 8 character name of the new file.  Specify path if you
                   want to save file in a directory other than current one.
                   Don't specify a file extension (.AG is used automatically).

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a file,   » Index

Category Conversion Confirmation Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Convert to         Yes.......Convert the current standard category to the
unindexed/date/              specified type (unindexed, date, or numeric).
numeric category             Once you change a category to unindexed, date, or
(can't be changed            numeric, you can't change its type.
back)?
                             Caution:  When you convert the standard category
                             to unindexed, date, or numeric, its children are
                             converted to text, date, or numeric values
                             (respectively) where possible.  Children that
                             can't be converted are discarded.

                   No........Cancel the conversion request and keep the
                             category as a standard category.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Confirm Assignments

PURPOSE       By default, Agenda automatically assigns items to categories if
              their text matches.  But you can use the File Properties or
              Category Properties command to make Agenda ask you to confirm
              these assignments before it establishes them.  If you do so,
              Agenda displays a ? in the control panel whenever it has
              assignments for you to confirm.  You can then confirm or cancel
              each of these assignments.

STEPS         In a view:
              1. F10 Utilities Questions
              2. Agenda displays a list of suggested categories to which you
                 might want to assign a specified item.  Use these keys:
                  To assign the item to all these categories, press TAB.
                  Or, choose particular categories by highlighting them (with
                   , , PGUP, PGDN) and pressing SPACEBAR.
              3. Press ENTER.  If Agenda wants you to confirm assignments for
                 another item, it displays these.

RESULT        The assignments you confirm for each item become explicit
              assignments (which won't change if you edit that item's text).

Go to a Section

PURPOSE       You can quickly go to any section in the current view.

STEPS         In a view:

              1. ALT-F5 (GOTO)

              2. Agenda displays a list of sections.  Type the name of the one
                 you want or highlight it by using these keys:

                 PRESS               TO MOVE THE HIGHLIGHT
                 ------------------  -----------------------------------------
                 ,                 Up or down one section at a time
                 PGUP, PGDN          Up or down several sections at a time
                 HOME, END           To the beginning or end of the list

              3. Press ENTER.

RESULT        Agenda displays the section you select and highlights the
              section head.

Copy Conditions/Actions

PURPOSE       You can copy the conditions or actions that are defined for
              one category to another category.

STEPS         In the category manager:
              1. Highlight the source category (whose conditions or actions
                 you want to copy to another category).
              2. ALT-F9 (CPY C/A)
              3. Highlight the target category (to which these conditions or
                 actions are to be copied) and press ENTER.
              4. If the source category has both conditions and actions,
                 Agenda prompts you to specify what to copy (only the
                 conditions, only the actions, or both).

RESULTS       When you copy only conditions, Agenda erases all existing
              conditions from the target category (but keeps all actions).
              When you copy only actions, Agenda erases all existing actions
              from the target category (but keeps all conditions).

              Copying doesn't affect the source category's conditions or
              actions.

EXAMPLE 1     If you copy the conditions from the Fred category to the Barney
              category:

              BEFORE COPYING                 AFTER COPYING
                Calls                          Calls
                People                         People
                  Fred   C= North,West           Fred   C= North,West
                  Barney C= South A= New         Barney C= North,West A= New

EXAMPLE 2     If you copy the actions from the Wilma category to the Betty
              category:

              BEFORE COPYING                 AFTER COPYING
                Ideas                          Ideas
                Schedules                      Schedules
                Staff                          Staff
                  Betty  A= Sales                Betty  A= Budgets
                  Wilma  C= Jack A= Budgets      Wilma  C= Jack A= Budgets

Reposition a Category in the Hierarchy

PURPOSE       You can rearrange the category hierarchy by moving individual
              categories.

STEPS         In the category manager:

              1. Highlight the category you want to move.
              2. ALT-F10 (MOVE)
              3. Highlight the category below or above which you want the
                 moved category to appear.
              4. Do one of the following:
                  Press ENTER to paste the category below the highlight.
                  Or, press CTRL-ENTER to paste it above the highlight.

RESULTS       Agenda moves the specified category from its present position in
              the hierarchy to the new position.  If the category is a parent,
              its children move with it.

NOTE          Agenda won't complete the move if the category's new position
              would create an invalid structure in the hierarchy (for example,
              if you try to move a parent after one of its children).

Macro Manager

PURPOSE       Use the macro manager whenever you want to create new macros or
              work with the existing macros in the Agenda file.

STEPS         In a view, a note, or the category manager:
               ALT-F3 (MACRO)

USES          Once you're in the macro manager, here's what you can do:

              PRESS               IF YOU WANT TO
              ------------------  --------------------------------------------
              INS                 Add a new macro name to the list
              F7 (LEARN)          Record keystrokes in highlighted macro
              F2 (EDITMAC)        Edit the contents of highlighted macro
              ENTER               Run highlighted macro
              F4 (DELETE) or DEL  Delete highlighted macro
              F6 (PROPS)          Change the properties of highlighted macro
              ALT-F5 (SORT)       Sort the list of macros alphabetically
              ALT-F7 (DISPLAY)    Display/hide any hidden macros in the list
              ALT-F10 (MOVE)      Reposition highlighted macro in the list

SEE ALSO

Macro indicators,   Represent keys,   Macro commands,   » Index

Record a Macro

PURPOSE       The easiest way to create a macro is to use Learn mode. In Learn
              mode, Agenda records your keystrokes in a macro.  Once you turn
              off Learn mode, you can re-execute those keystrokes by running
              the macro.  You can also edit the recorded macro to include
              macro commands.

START         In a view, a note, or the category manager:
RECORDING
              1. ALT-F3 (MACRO)
              2. Do one of the following:
                  To record keystrokes in a new macro, press INS and type the
                   new macro name (1 to 35 characters).  Then press ENTER.
                  Or to record keystrokes in an existing macro, highlight its
                   name in the list.  (Agenda later prompts you to replace
                   this macro's contents or append the new keystrokes to it.)
              3. F7 (LEARN)

              Agenda displays the LEARN indicator in the control panel.  You
              can now type the keystrokes you want to record in the macro.

STOP          From anywhere:
RECORDING      ALT-F3 (MACRO)
              Agenda stops recording your keystrokes and saves the macro.

NOTE          Learn mode records the keystrokes you press but not which parts
              of Agenda (view, note, category manager, etc.) you're in when
              you press them.  This means you should run the macro from the
              same part of Agenda in which you started recording it.
              Otherwise, the keystrokes in the macro will perform operations
              you don't intend.

              Example:  Suppose you start recording in a view and press
              F7 to mark an item.  If you later run this macro in the category
              manager, the F7 keystroke promotes a category (because that is
              what F7 does in the category manager).

              Tip:  You can use settings in the Macro Properties box to
              control where a macro can be run.  Press F6 (PROPS) in the macro
              manager to display the Macro Properties box.

SEE ALSO

Macro manager,   » Index

Macro Manager Indicators

INDICATORS    Some indicators appear in the top line of the macro manager.
IN TOP LINE   They apply only to the highlighted macro:

              INDICATOR    WHAT IT MEANS
              -----------  ---------------------------------------------------
              ¶            This macro is protected.
              J            This macro can override protection.
              V            You can run this macro from views.
              C            You can run this macro from the category manager.
              N            You can run this macro from notes.
              E            You can run this macro from everywhere else.

OTHER         Other indicators may appear beside a macro in the macro manager:
INDICATORS
              {key}        The macro is attached to this key (such as {CtlA}).
              jj            The macro is stored in an external macro file.
              <R1>         The macro was created in an earlier Agenda release.

TIP           You can use the Macro Properties box to control the features
              these indicators refer to.  Press F6 (PROPS) in macro manager.

Represent Keys in a Macro

PURPOSE       While editing a macro in the macro editor, you may want to
              include one or more keystrokes that the macro is to perform.
              Agenda provides 2 methods you can use to enter these keystrokes.

KEY CAPTURE   You can have Agenda capture the key for you and insert the
METHOD        appropriate key name into the macro:

              1. Press ALT =
              2. Press the actual key you want to include in the macro.

              Example:  If you type ALT = and then CTRL-A, Agenda inserts the
              key name {CtlA} into the macro.

              Note: CTRL-[, CTRL-H, CTRL-I, CTRL-J, and CTRL-M are recorded as
              other keys (described later).

              Tip:  If you want to capture lots of keystrokes in a macro, you
              may want to use Learn mode.

MANUAL        Another way to insert a key into a macro is to type the key name
METHOD        yourself.  Use the key names shown in the following table:

              TO REPRESENT         TYPE
              -------------------  -------------------------------------------
              Text keys            The key itself (examples: a, 1, +, $)
              CTRL keys            {CtlA}, {CtlB}, {CtlC}, etc.
              ALT keys             {AltA}, {AltB}, {AltC}, etc. (see NOTES)
              Function keys        {F1}, {F2}, {F3}, etc.
              CTRL function keys   {CtlF1}, {CtlF2}, {CtlF3}, etc.
              ALT function keys    {AltF2}, {AltF4}, {AltF5}, etc. (see NOTES)
              SHIFT function keys  {ShfF1}, {ShfF2}, {ShfF3}, etc.
              TAB                  {TAB}
              BACKSPACE            {BS}
              ENTER                {ENTER}
              ESC                  {ESC}
              HOME                 {HOME}
              END                  {END}

MANUAL        TO REPRESENT     TYPE               TO REPRESENT     TYPE
METHOD        ---------------  -----------        ---------------  -----------
              INS              {INS}              CTRL-PRINTSCRN   {CtlPRTSC}
              DEL              {DEL}              CTRL-ENTER       {CtlENTER}
                              {UP}               CTRL-HOME        {CtlHOME}
                              {DOWN}             CTRL-END         {CtlEND}
                              {LEFT}             CTRL-           {CtlLEFT}
                              {RIGHT}            CTRL-           {CtlRIGHT}
              PGUP             {PGUP}             CTRL-PGUP        {CtlPGUP}
              PGDN             {PGDN}             CTRL-PGDN        {CtlPGDN}
              GREY -           {GREY-}            SHIFT-GREY -     {ALT-}
              GREY +           {GREY+}            SHIFT-GREY +     {ALT+}
              CTRL-BREAK       {CtlBRK}           SHIFT-TAB        {ShfTAB}
              CTRL-[           {ESC}              SHIFT-ENTER      {ShfENTER}
              CTRL-H           {BS}
              CTRL-I           {TAB}
              CTRL-J           {CtlENTER}
              CTRL-M           {ENTER}

NOTES         » To include a space character in a macro, just press SPACEBAR.

              » Initial spaces and TABs on a line are ignored.

              » ALT-0 through ALT-9 represent international characters.  See
                Appendix D in the User's Guide for details.

              » You can't represent ALT-Z, ALT-F1, or ALT-F3 in a macro.

SEE ALSO

Macro manager,   Macro commands,   » Index

Macros

PURPOSE        A macro is a set of keystrokes and/or commands that you create
               to perform tasks for you in Agenda.  Whenever you run a macro,
               Agenda reads through the keystrokes and commands in it and
               executes them automatically.

WORK WITH      When you want to work with macros, you use the macro manager.
MACROS         It lists all of the macros in the current Agenda file (up to
               100 of them) and lets you create new macros or edit, run, or
               delete existing ones.

SAMPLE MACRO   The following macro called SEARCHMAC prompts you for text and
               then searches for that text in the current view:
               +------------------------+
               | {searchmac}            |...Name of the macro (always first)
               | {inputtext;Enter text  |...The macro command {INPUTTEXT}
               | to search for;%search} |
               | {altf6}                |...The keystroke ALT-F6
               | {type;%search}         |...The macro command {TYPE}
               | {enter;2}              |...The macro command {ENTER}
               +------------------------+

Variables in a Macro

TYPES          You can define string variables and numeric variables (integer
               or floating point) in a macro.

GLOBAL VS.     When you define a variable, you can make it global or local:
LOCAL
                A global variable is accessible by all macros in the Agenda
                 file.  It's also permanent (remains till you undefine it with
                 {UNDEF}). To make a variable global, type %% at the beginning
                 of its name (example: %%cost).

                A local variable is accessible only by the macro in which it
                 is defined.  It's also temporary (automatically undefined
                 when the macro finishes executing). To make a variable local,
                 type % at the beginning of its name (example: %subtotal).

EXPRESSIONS    You can specify an expression wherever a numeric variable is
               allowed.  Use expressions to perform mathematical operations or
               string comparisons.  Operators to use: + - * / < > <= >= <> =
               Example: (%%parts + %labor) * .05

SEE ALSO

Macro editor,   Macro commands,   Special variables,   » Index

About Macro Commands

PURPOSE        Macro commands are instructions you can include in a macro
               (in addition to keystrokes) to make it perform particular
               operations.  Agenda provides 6 kinds of macro commands.

VARIABLE       These commands define variables and assign values to them:
DEFINITION     {CLEAR}        {DEFINT}        {LET}
               {DEFFLOAT}     {DEFSTR}        {UNDEF}

STRING         These commands manipulate text stored in string variables:
MANIPULATION   {APPEND}       {LEFTSTR}       {MIDSTR}
               {FIND}         {LENGTH}        {RIGHTSTR}

FLOW OF        These commands control the path of the macro's execution:
CONTROL        {BRANCH}       {GOTO}          {IFKEY}         {ONBREAK}
               {CALL}         {IF}            {IFNOTEQ}       {ONERROR}
               {FOR}          {IFEQ}          {LABEL}         {RETURN}

INPUT/OUTPUT   These commands get info from, and display info to, the user:
               {ALERT}        {INPUTCAT}      {INPUTTEXT}     {LOTUSMENU}
               {GETKEY}       {INPUTFILE}     {LARGEBOX}      {ROLLMENU}

HIGHLIGHT      These commands control how the highlight moves on the screen:
CONTROL        {UP}           {PGUP}          {CTLHOME}       {INS}
               {DOWN}         {PGDN}          {CTLEND}        {DEL}
               {LEFT}         {CTLPGUP}       {TAB}           {ESC}
               {RIGHT}        {CTLPGDN}       {SHFTAB}        {SELECTION}
               {CTLLEFT}      {HOME}          {BS}
               {CTLRIGHT}     {END}           {ENTER}

MISCELLANEOUS  These commands control macro execution and the screen display:
               {COMMENT}      {QUIT}          {TYPE}          {WINDOWSON}
               {DEBUGOFF}     {SPEED}         {WINDOWSOFF}    {WINDOWSUPD}
               {DEBUGON}

SEE ALSO

Macro manager,   Macro editor,   Represent keys,   Syntax,   About variables,   Special variables,   » Index

Macro Command Syntax

MACRO COMMAND      DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
{ALERT}            Purpose: Display a box with one or two messages and wait
                            for user to press a key.
                   Syntax:  {ALERT;boxtop_message;main_message}
                   Example: {alert;Error;Highlight is not on a category}

{APPEND}           Purpose: Append a string to a string variable.
                   Syntax:  {APPEND;strvar;string}
                   Example: {append;%lastname;%firstname}

{BRANCH}           Purpose: Transfer control of execution to another point in
                            the same macro.  See the {GOTO} command.
                   Syntax:  {BRANCH;labelname}
                   Example: {branch;loopb}

{BS}               Purpose: Perform BACKSPACE keystroke a number of times.
                   Syntax:  {BS[;number]}
                   Example: {bs;3}

{CALL}             Purpose: Transfer control of execution to another macro.
                            Current macro regains control when called macro
                            executes {RETURN}.
                   Syntax:  {CALL;macroname[;parameter1;parameter2];...}
                   Example: {call;addmac;John Smith;"555-1234"}

{CLEAR}            Purpose: Set the value of some (or all) string variables to
                            null, or numeric variables to zero (0).
                   Syntax:  {CLEAR;var1;var2;...} or {CLEAR;ALL}
                   Example: {clear;%custname;%address}

{COMMENT}          Purpose: Add explanatory text to the macro (not executed).
                   Syntax:  {COMMENT;text}
                   Example: {comment;This is my comment text}

{CTLEND}           Purpose: Perform CTRL-END keystroke a number of times.
                   Syntax:  {CTLEND[;number]}       Example: {ctlend;2}

{CTLHOME}          Purpose: Perform CTRL-HOME keystroke a number of times.
                   Syntax:  {CTLHOME[;number]}      Example: {ctlhome;2}

{CTLLEFT}          Purpose: Perform CTRL- keystroke a number of times.
                   Syntax:  {CTLLEFT[;number]}      Example: {ctlleft;3}

{CTLPGDN}          Purpose: Perform CTRL-PGDN keystroke a number of times.
                   Syntax:  {CTLPGDN[;number]}      Example: {ctlpgdn;2}

{CTLPGUP}          Purpose: Perform CTRL-PGUP keystroke a number of times.
                   Syntax:  {CTLPGUP[;number]}      Example: {ctlpgup;4}

{CTLRIGHT}         Purpose: Perform CTRL- keystroke a number of times.
                   Syntax:  {CTLRIGHT[;number]}     Example: {ctlright;3}

{DEBUGOFF}         Purpose: Turn off single-step macro execution.
                   Syntax:  {DEBUGOFF}

{DEBUGON}          Purpose: Turn on single-step macro execution (to run the
                            macro one keystroke or instruction at a time).
                   Syntax:  {DEBUGON}

{DEFFLOAT}         Purpose: Define one or more numeric floating-point
                            variables.
                   Syntax:  {DEFFLOAT;numvar1;numvar2;...}
                   Example: {deffloat;%rate}

{DEFINT}           Purpose: Define one or more numeric integer variables.
                   Syntax:  {DEFINT;numvar1;numvar2;...}
                   Example: {defint;%count}

{DEFSTR}           Purpose: Define one or more string variables.
                   Syntax:  {DEFSTR;strvar1;strvar2;...}  Example: {defstr;%n}

{DEL}              Purpose: Perform DEL keystroke a number of times.
                   Syntax:  {DEL[;number]}                Example: {del;5}

{DOWN}             Purpose: Perform  keystroke a number of times.
                   Syntax:  {DOWN[;number]}               Example: {down;7}

{END}              Purpose: Perform END keystroke a number of times.
                   Syntax:  {END[;number]}                Example: {end;2}

{ENTER}            Purpose: Perform ENTER keystroke a number of times.
                   Syntax:  {ENTER[;number]}              Example: {enter;2}

{ESC}              Purpose: Perform ESC keystroke a number of times.
                   Syntax:  {ESC[;number]}                Example: {esc;3}

{FIND}             Purpose: Search for a string within another string.
                   Syntax:  {FIND;numvar;string1;string2;position}
                   Example: {find;%location;one two three;three;1}

{FOR}              Purpose: Initiate a loop to perform a task for a certain
                            number of times.  {LABEL} ends a {FOR} loop.
                   Syntax:  {FOR;numvar;initialval;finalval;incr;labelname}
                   Example: {for;%item;1;10;1;endloop}

{GETKEY}           Purpose: Pause until user presses a key, then store that
                            keystroke in a variable.
                   Syntax:  {GETKEY;strvar}         Example: {getkey;%keystrk}

{GOTO}             Purpose: Transfer control of execution to another macro.
                            Control doesn't automatically return to current
                            macro when the other macro finishes executing.
                   Syntax:  {GOTO;macroname}        Example: {goto;salesmacro}

{HOME}             Purpose: Perform HOME keystroke a number of times.
                   Syntax:  {HOME[;number]}         Example: {home;2}

{IF}               Purpose: Branch to a {LABEL} if an expression is true.
                   Syntax:  {IF;expression;labelname}
                   Example: {if;(%a=%b);equal}

{IFEQ}             Purpose: Branch to a {LABEL} if 2 strings are equal.
                   Syntax:  {IFEQ;value1;value2;labelname}
                   Example: {ifeq;%oldname;%newname;nochange}

{IFKEY}            Purpose: Branch to a {LABEL} if the user presses a key.
                   Syntax:  {IFKEY;labelname}       Example: {ifkey;endloop}

{IFNOTEQ}          Purpose: Branch to a {LABEL} if 2 strings are not equal.
                   Syntax:  {IFNOTEQ;value1;value2;labelname}
                   Example: {ifnoteq;%oldname;%newname;changes}

{INPUTCAT}         Purpose: Pause until the user enters a category name, then
                            store that name in a variable.
                   Syntax:  {INPUTCAT;prompt_message;var}
                   Example: {inputcat;Enter category name;%catname}

{INPUTFILE}        Purpose: Pause until the user enters a file name, then
                            store that name in a variable.
                   Syntax:  {INPUTFILE;prompt_message;var}
                   Example: {inputfile;Enter file name;%filename}

{INPUTTEXT}        Purpose: Pause until the user enters text, then store that
                            text in a variable.
                   Syntax:  {INPUTTEXT;prompt_message;var}
                   Example: {inputtext;Enter text;%usertext}

{INS}              Purpose: Perform INS keystroke a number of times.
                   Syntax:  {INS[;number]}          Example: {ins;2}

{LABEL}            Purpose: Make reference point that {BRANCH}, {IF}, {IFEQ},
                            {IFKEY}, {IFNOTEQ}, and {FOR} can branch to.
                   Syntax:  {LABEL;labelname}
                   Example: {label;startloop}

{LARGEBOX}         Purpose: Display a screen of information and wait for user
                            to press ENTER.
                   Syntax:  {LARGEBOX[;header];string}
                   Example: {largebox;Sales Application;Questions? Call Fred}

{LEFT}             Purpose: Perform  keystroke a number of times.
                   Syntax:  {LEFT[;number]}         Example: {left;7}

{LEFTSTR}          Purpose: Put into a string variable a certain number of the
                            leftmost characters from another string.
                   Syntax:  {LEFTSTR;strvar;string;width}
                   Example: {leftstr;%result;%lastname;5}

{LENGTH}           Purpose: Assign the number of characters in a string to
                            a numeric variable.
                   Syntax:  {LENGTH;numvar;string}
                   Example: {length;%namelength;%lastname}

{LET}              Purpose: Assign a character string to a string variable or
                            a numeric value to a numeric variable.
                   Syntax:  {LET;var;string} or {LET;var;number}
                   Example: {let;%region;Northeast} or {let;%count;(%x+100)}

{LOTUSMENU}        Purpose: Display horizontal (Lotus-style) menu across top
                            of screen so user can select commands.
                   Syntax:  {LOTUSMENU;number;choice1;string1;label1
                                            [;choice2;string2;label2]...}
                   Example: {lotusmenu;2;Mark;Mark items;markstuff;
                                         Print;Print marked items;printstuff}

{MIDSTR}           Purpose: Put into a string variable a certain number of the
                            characters from within another string.
                   Syntax:  {MIDSTR;strvar;string;position;width}
                   Example: {midstr;%result;%usertext;2;10}

{ONBREAK}          Purpose: Transfer control to a break-handler macro if
                            CTRL-BREAK is pressed during macro execution.
                   Syntax:  {ONBREAK;macroname}  Example: {onbreak;breakmacro}

{ONERROR}          Purpose: Transfer control to an error-handler macro.
                   Syntax:  {ONERROR;macroname}  Example: {onerror;errormacro}

{PGDN}             Purpose: Perform PGDN keystroke a number of times.
                   Syntax:  {PGDN[;number]}      Example: {pgdn;3}

{PGUP}             Purpose: Perform PGUP keystroke a number of times.
                   Syntax:  {PGUP[;number]}      Example: {pgup;2}

{QUIT}             Purpose: Terminate macro execution.
                   Syntax:  {QUIT} or {QUIT;ERROR}

{RETURN}           Purpose: Return control of execution to the macro
                            that called the current macro (using {CALL},
                            {ONBREAK}, or {ONERROR}).
                   Syntax:  {RETURN}

{RIGHT}            Purpose: Perform  keystroke a number of times.
                   Syntax:  {RIGHT[;number]}
                   Example: {right;6}

{RIGHTSTR}         Purpose: Put into a string variable a certain number of the
                            rightmost characters from another string.
                   Syntax:  {RIGHTSTR;strvar;string;width}
                   Example: {rightstr;%result;%usertext;5}

{ROLLMENU}         Purpose: Display vertical menu (a box containing a list of
                            choices) so user can select choices.
                   Syntax:  {ROLLMENU;header;prompt;number;choice1;label1
                                                         [;choice2;label2]...}
                   Example: {rollmenu;Do you want to quit?;
                            Highlight choice and press ENTER;2;
                            Yes;quitstuff;
                            No;noquitstuff}

{SELECTION}        Purpose: In a box containing settings, move the highlight
                            to a specific setting.
                   Syntax:  {SELECTION;string}
                   Example: {selection;Category name}

{SHFTAB}           Purpose: Perform SHIFT-TAB keystroke a number of times.
                   Syntax:  {SHFTAB[;number]}
                   Example: {shftab;2}

{SPEED}            Purpose: Set speed of macro execution below normal (MAX).
                   Syntax:  {SPEED;SLOW} or {SPEED;MED} or {SPEED;FAST} or
                            {SPEED;MAX}

{TAB}              Purpose: Perform TAB keystroke a number of times.
                   Syntax:  {TAB[;number]}          Example: {tab;3}

{TYPE}             Purpose: Type the contents of a variable as if the user
                            had typed it on the keyboard.
                   Syntax:  {TYPE;parameter}        Example: {type;%name}

{UNDEF}            Purpose: Undefine some or all numeric & string variables.
                   Syntax:  {UNDEF;var1;var2;...} or {UNDEF;ALL}
                   Example: {undef;%firstname}

{UP}               Purpose: Perform  keystroke a number of times.
                   Syntax:  {UP[;number]}           Example: {up;5}

{WINDOWSOFF}       Purpose: Freeze screen display while macro is running,
                            optionally displaying a "Please wait" box.
                   Syntax:  {WINDOWSOFF[;header;footer]}
                   Example: {windowsoff;Sales Application;XYZ Corporation}

{WINDOWSON}        Purpose: Unfreeze a screen previously frozen by the
                            {WINDOWSOFF} command.
                   Syntax:  {WINDOWSON}

{WINDOWSUPD}       Purpose: Update a screen previously frozen by the
                            {WINDOWSOFF} command and then refreeze it.
                   Syntax:  {WINDOWSUPD}

SEE ALSO

Editor,   About commands,   About variables,   Special variables,   » Index

Special Variables in Macros

PURPOSE        Agenda provides several special variables you can include in
               macro commands.  Each special variable returns a particular
               kind of value, such as the current date.

EXAMPLE        To make the macro type the current date on the screen, you use
               the special variable #DATE in the {TYPE} macro command:

                 {type;#date}

WHAT THEY      SPECIAL VARIABLE   VALUE IT RETURNS
ARE            -----------------  --------------------------------------------
               #ARGCOUNT          Number of {CALL} arguments to be executed
               #ASCII(nnn)        Character with the ASCII value nnn
               #CLIPBOARD         Current contents of cut/copy clipboard
               #DATE              Current system date
               #DEPTH             Level of highlighted category in hierarchy
               #ERRMSG            Message text of last error that occurred
               #ERRNO             Number of last error that occurred
               #FALSE             False value (or 0)

               #FILENAME          Name and extension of current Agenda file
               #FILEPATH          Path of current Agenda file (excluding name)
               #HIGHLIGHT_TYPE    What kind of entity is currently highlighted
               #HIGHLIGHT_VALUE   Value of the currently highlighted entity
               #KEYHIT            True (1) if user hits key, false (0) if not
               #MARK_COUNT        Number of marked items in current file
               #MARKED_IN_VIEW    Number of marked items in current view
               #MODE              What part of Agenda you're currently in
               #NULL              Null value (or empty)
               #PROMPT            Name of highlighted setting in a box
               #TIME              Current system time
               #TRUE              True value (or 1)
               #VIEWNAME          Name of current or most recent view

SEE ALSO

Macro editor,   Command syntax,   About variables,   » Index

Macro Editor

PURPOSE       Use the macro editor whenever you want to display, enter, or
              modify the contents of any macro.

TO GET        In the macro manager:
THERE         1. Highlight the macro you want to edit.
              2. F2 (EDITMAC)

BASIC EDIT    While you're in the macro editor, use these basic editing keys:
KEYS
              PRESS               IF YOU WANT TO
              ------------------  --------------------------------------------
              DEL                 Delete highlighted character
              BACKSPACE           Delete previous character
              INS                 Switch between Insert and Overwrite mode
              TAB                 Insert several spaces (to the next tab stop)
              ENTER or ALT-M      Insert a new line
              CTRL-BACKSPACE      Delete previous word
              ALT-W               Delete next word
              CTRL-ENTER          Delete from highlight to end of line

HIGHLIGHT     PRESS               TO MOVE THE HIGHLIGHT
MOVEMENT      ------------------  --------------------------------------------
              ,                 Up/down one line
              ,                 Left/right one character
              PGUP, PGDN          Up/down one page
              CTRL-, CTRL-      Left/right one word
              HOME, END           To beginning/end of line
              CTRL-HOME           To beginning of macro
              CTRL-END            To end of macro

BLOCK         PRESS               IF YOU WANT TO
EDITING       ------------------  --------------------------------------------
              F7 (MARK)           Mark region of text to cut, copy, or delete
              F3 (COPY)           Copy marked (or other) text
              F4 (CUT)            Move marked (or other) text
              F2 (PASTE)          Paste the copied or cut text at new location
              ALT-F4 (DELETE)     Delete marked (or other) text from macro

OTHER         USE                 IF YOU WANT TO
FEATURES      ------------------  --------------------------------------------
              ALT-F6 (SEARCH)     Find and/or replace text in the macro
              ALT-F1 (COMPOSE)    Insert a non-keyboard character at highlight
              ALT-D or ALT-T      Insert current date or time at highlight
              F10 Clear           Clear the contents of the macro
              F10 Print           Print the macro
              F10 Import          Insert contents of a text file at highlight
              F10 Export          Copy contents of the macro to a text file
              F10 File            Maintain the macro in an external file (jj)

LEAVE         To leave the macro editor and save your changes to the macro,
AND SAVE      do one of the following:
               To return to macro manager, use F5 (RETURN) or F10 Return.
               Or, quit Agenda completely by using ALT-Q or F10 Quit.

CANCEL        To leave the macro editor but cancel the changes you've made:
CHANGES        Press ESC.
              Agenda returns you to the macro manager.

SEE ALSO

Represent keys,   Macro commands,   » Index

Attach an External Macro File

PURPOSE       When you type a macro, the macro editor normally stores it in
              the Agenda file.  But you can store it instead in a new external
              (ASCII) file if you attach a file name before typing the macro.
              Or, you can attach an existing external file that contains a
              macro you typed in a word processor or exported from Agenda.

STEPS         In the macro editor:
              1. F10 File Attach
              2. Enter the name of the external file (and path, if necessary).

              Or, in the macro manager:
              1. Highlight the macro and press F6 (PROPS)
              2. Complete the Macro File setting with the name of the external
                 file (and path, if necessary).

NOTES         » The keystrokes and commands in the attached file can't exceed
                2,000 characters (including comments: 10,000 characters).
              » You can attach an external macro file to many Agenda files.

RESULT        The macro manager displays jj next to macros with attached files.

Note Editor

PURPOSE       Use the note editor whenever you want to display, enter, or
              modify the contents of a note.

TO GET        In a view or the category manager:
THERE         1. Highlight the item or category whose note you want to edit.
              2. F5 (NOTE)

BASIC EDIT    While you're in the note editor, use these basic editing keys:
KEYS
              PRESS               IF YOU WANT TO
              ------------------  --------------------------------------------
              DEL                 Delete highlighted character
              BACKSPACE           Delete previous character
              INS                 Switch between Insert and Overwrite mode
              TAB                 Insert several spaces (to the next tab stop)
              ENTER or ALT-M      Insert a new line
              CTRL-BACKSPACE      Delete previous word
              ALT-W               Delete next word
              CTRL-ENTER          Delete from highlight to end of line

HIGHLIGHT     PRESS               TO MOVE THE HIGHLIGHT
MOVEMENT      ------------------  --------------------------------------------
              ,                 Up/down one line
              ,                 Left/right one character
              PGUP, PGDN          Up/down one page
              CTRL-, CTRL-      Left/right one word
              HOME, END           To beginning/end of line
              CTRL-HOME           To beginning of note
              CTRL-END            To end of note

BLOCK         PRESS               IF YOU WANT TO
EDITING       ------------------  --------------------------------------------
              F7 (MARK)           Mark region of text to cut, copy, or delete
              F3 (COPY)           Copy marked (or other) text
              F4 (CUT)            Move marked (or other) text
              F2 (PASTE)          Paste the copied or cut text at new location
              ALT-F4 (DELETE)     Delete marked (or other) text from note
              F6 (MARKER)         Change attributes or font of marked text

CATEGORY      PRESS               IF YOU WANT TO
AND ITEM      ------------------  --------------------------------------------
CREATION      ALT-F2 (MAKECAT)    Make current word (or marked text) into new
                                  category (without removing it from the note)
              ALT-F7 (MAKEITM)    Make marked (or other) text into a new item
                                  (and remove it from the note)
              ALT-F8 (GETITMS)    Copy marked items (t) and their notes into
                                  the current note
              ALT-F9 (APPEND)     Move marked (or other) text from the note to
                                  end of current item text or category name

OTHER         USE                 IF YOU WANT TO
FEATURES      ------------------  --------------------------------------------
              ALT-F6 (SEARCH)     Find and/or replace text in the note
              ALT-F1 (COMPOSE)    Insert a non-keyboard character at highlight
              ALT-D or ALT-T      Insert current date or time at highlight
              F6 (MARKER)         Insert special information at highlight
              F10 Clear           Clear the contents of the note
              F10 Print           Print the note

OTHER         USE                 IF YOU WANT TO
FEATURES      ------------------  --------------------------------------------
              F10 Import          Insert contents of a text file at highlight
              F10 Export          Copy contents of the note to a text file
              F10 File            Maintain the note in an external file (jj)

LEAVE         To leave the note editor, do one of the following:

              USE                 IF YOU WANT TO
              ------------------  --------------------------------------------
              F10 Return or F5    Save your changes to the note and return to
                                  the view or category manager
              F10 Quit or ALT-Q   Save your changes to the note and quit
                                  Agenda
              ALT-N or ALT-P      Display the note for next/previous item or
                                  category (and optionally save your changes)
              ESC                 Cancel your changes to the note and return
                                  to the view or category manager

SEE ALSO

Display category notes in a column,   » Index

Edit Mode

PURPOSE       Use Edit mode to edit text (such as items, category names, view
              names, descriptions) anywhere in Agenda.

START         Sometimes Agenda puts you in Edit mode automatically (such as
EDIT MODE     when you insert a new item in a view) -- look for the EDIT
              indicator in the top right corner of the screen.  But if you
              aren't already in Edit mode:
              1. Highlight the item, category, setting, or other text to edit.
              2. F2 (EDIT)

BASIC EDIT    While you're in Edit mode, use these basic editing keys:
KEYS
              PRESS               IF YOU WANT TO
              ------------------  --------------------------------------------
              DEL                 Delete highlighted character
              BACKSPACE           Delete previous character
              CTRL-BACKSPACE      Delete previous word
              ALT-W               Delete next word
              CTRL-ENTER          Delete from highlight to end of line

HIGHLIGHT     PRESS               TO MOVE THE HIGHLIGHT
MOVEMENT      ------------------  --------------------------------------------
              ,                 Up/down one line
              ,                 Left/right one character
              CTRL-, CTRL-      Left/right one word
              HOME, END           To beginning/end of line
              CTRL-HOME           To beginning of text
              CTRL-END            To end of text

BLOCK         PRESS               IF YOU WANT TO
EDITING       ------------------  --------------------------------------------
              F7 (MARK)           Mark region of text to cut, copy, or delete
              F3 (COPY)           Copy marked (or other) text
              F4 (CUT)            Move marked (or other) text
              F2 (PASTE)          Paste the copied or cut text at new location
              ALT-F4 (DELETE)     Delete marked (or other) text

SPECIAL       To insert a non-keyboard character at the highlight:
CHARACTERS    1. ALT-F1 (COMPOSE)
              2. Type a key sequence (see Appendix D in the User's Guide).

ITEM          You can use these additional keys when editing items in a view:
EDITING
              PRESS               IF YOU WANT TO
              ------------------  --------------------------------------------
              F6 (MARKER)         Change attributes or font of marked text, or
                                  insert special info at highlight (note: you
                                  can also use this key when editing a print
                                  header or footer)
              ALT-F2 (MAKECAT)    Make current word (or marked text) into new
                                  category (without removing it from the item)
              ALT-F7 (SPLIT)      Split current item into 2 separate items at
                                  highlight (or if you've marked text, make
                                  that text a separate item)
              ALT-D or ALT-T      Insert current date or time at highlight
              ALT-M               Insert a new line within current item
              ALT-N or ALT-P      Accept edits to current item and edit next
                                  or previous item in the view
              ALT-I               Accept edits to current item and insert a
                                  new item in the view

ITEM          PRESS               IF YOU WANT TO
EDITING       ------------------  --------------------------------------------
              INS                 Accept edits to current item (or to current
                                  section/column head) and insert a new item
                                  in the view (note: you can also use INS when
                                  editing a column entry, but it inserts a new
                                  column entry instead of a new item)
              TAB                 Accept edits to current item (or category)
                                  in the view and travel 1 column to the right
              SHIFT-TAB           Accept edits to current item (or category)
                                  in the view and travel 1 column to the left

LEAVE         Do either of the following:
EDIT MODE
               Press ENTER to accept your edits.
               Or, press ESC to cancel your edits.

NOTE          Once you edit an item or a category name, you see your changes
              reflected everywhere that item or category name appears.

Fill in a Dialog Box

PURPOSE       When you select commands or press keys, Agenda often displays
              dialog boxes on the screen.  A dialog box contains 1 or more
              settings that you can fill in to tell Agenda what to do.

STEPS         1. Fill in or change the appropriate settings in the box.
                 Note: You often don't need to complete every setting. That's
                 because many have a default value and others are optional.
              2. Either:
                  Press ENTER to leave the box and accept your changes.
                  Or, press ESC to leave the box and cancel your changes.

HIGHLIGHT     To move the highlight from one setting to another in the box:
MOVEMENT
              PRESS               TO MOVE THE HIGHLIGHT
              ------------------  --------------------------------------------
              ,                 Up/down one setting
               or TAB            Right one setting
               or SHIFT-TAB      Left one setting (BACKSPACE also does this)
              HOME, END           To first/last setting in box

COMPLETE      To work with the setting you've highlighted:
A SETTING
              IF THE SETTING    PRESS or TYPE       TO DO THIS
              ----------------  ------------------  --------------------------
              Provides a list   F3 (CHOICES)        Display a list of choices
              of choices                            you can select from

                                SPACEBAR            Cycle through the choices
                                                    one at a time

                                A letter key        Select the choice that
                                                    begins with that letter

              Lets you type     Your new text or    Replace the current
              text or a value   value, then ENTER   contents of the setting

                                F2 (EDIT)           Edit the current contents

                                CTRL-ENTER          Clear the setting

COMPLETE      IF THE SETTING    PRESS or TYPE       TO DO THIS
A SETTING     ----------------  ------------------  --------------------------
              Displays          SPACEBAR            Display a secondary
              ellipses (...)                        dialog box that contains
                                                    related settings or info

SPEED TIP     Press SHIFT-ENTER instead of ENTER if you want to complete the
              current setting AND the dialog box in one keystroke.

RESTORE       Once you change a setting, you may decide to change it back to
DEFAULTS      its original (default) value.  Do one of the following:

              PRESS             IF YOU WANT TO
              ----------------  ----------------------------------------------
              F8 (DEFAULT)      Restore the highlighted setting to its
                                default value
              ALT-F8 (DFLTALL)  Restore all settings in the box to their
                                default values
              Note:  Use File Properties command (Update Defaults) to change
              the values that Agenda uses as defaults for certain settings.

Select from a Choice List

PURPOSE       To help you fill in settings in a dialog box, Agenda often
              provides a list of choices from which you can select.

DISPLAY THE   1. Highlight the setting for which you want to display choices.
CHOICE LIST   2. F3 (CHOICES)
                 Agenda displays a box containing a list of choices (if
                 available for that setting).

SELECT A      1. Highlight a choice from the list using one of these methods:
CHOICE            Use , , PGUP, PGDN, HOME, and END to highlight a choice.
                  Or, start typing the name of the choice until Agenda
                   highlights it.
              2. Either:
                  Press ENTER to leave the choice list and select the
                   highlighted choice.
                  Or, press ESC to leave the choice list without selecting
                   a choice.

RESULT        If you select a choice from the list, Agenda displays that
              choice in the setting you're filling in.

Select Menu Commands

PURPOSE       One way you can tell Agenda what to do is to select commands
              from the menu.  (Another way is to press particular keys.)

DISPLAY       In a view, a note, the category manager, or the macro editor:
THE MENU       F10 (MENU) or /
              Agenda displays a menu of commands at the top of the screen.

SELECT A      Use one of these methods:
COMMAND        Press the first letter of the command.
               Or, use , , HOME, and END to highlight the command and
                press ENTER.
              Agenda may then prompt you for more info by displaying a submenu
              or a box that you must complete or select from.

CANCEL A      If you change your mind about a command, you can usually cancel
COMMAND       it (as long as it's not yet completed). Do one of the following:
               Press ESC to back up one step at a time.
               Or, press CTRL-BREAK to back all the way out of the menu.

SEE ALSO

List of commands and keys,   » Index

About Printing

PURPOSE       You can use Agenda to print views, notes, macros, info from the
              category hierarchy, and info about the file.

BEFORE YOU    When installing Agenda on your computer, you must specify the
PRINT         printer(s) you want to use.  If you later decide to use other
              printers, you must run the install program again to specify
              them.  See the Setting Up Agenda manual for details.

PRINT         Once you identify your printers, you can use Agenda to perform
FEATURES      any of these print services:

               Set up the printer ports and fonts for your primary and
                secondary printers
               Lay out how the printed document is to look
               Preview the document on screen before printing it on paper
               Print the final document on paper

              For convenience, you can also store your Layout, Preview, and
              Final print settings in a separate NPS file so you can use them
              later with a different view or Agenda file.

Set Up Printers

PURPOSE       You can choose which of your installed printers to use in Agenda
              as the primary and secondary printers.  Then you can identify
              the output ports for these printers and the fonts that are
              available for them to print.

STEPS         In a view, a note, the category manager, or the macro editor:
              1. F10 Print Setup
              2. Change the appropriate settings in the Print Setup box and
                 press ENTER.  (These settings apply to all parts of Agenda:
                 views, notes, the category manager, and the macro editor.)

NOTES         » You don't need to use Print Setup every time you print, only
                if you want to redefine your primary or secondary printers.
              » The settings you specify in Print Setup apply to all printing
                in Agenda, not just to the current Agenda file.
              » Print Setup just defines the fonts that your printers are able
                to print.  To specify which of these fonts to actually print
                in a particular document, use the Print Layout command.
              » Print Setup settings are not affected when you use NPS files.

SEE ALSO

About printing,   Preview display driver,   » Index

Lay Out a Printed Document

PURPOSE       You can control how a document is to look when printed.  Agenda
              lets you specify margins, spacing, fonts, text attributes, and
              header/footer text.

STEPS         In a view, a note, the category manager, or the macro editor:
              1. F10 Print Layout
              2. Change the appropriate settings in the Print Layout box and
                 press ENTER.  The settings that appear depend on the part of
                 Agenda you're using.  For more info, see:
                  Layout settings in a view
                  Layout settings in the category manager
                  Layout settings in the note/macro editor

NOTES         » If you change the default Layout settings (for views, category
                manager, or notes/macros), Agenda saves those new settings in
                the current Agenda file.
              » To use your Layout settings as the defaults in all new Agenda
                files, use the File Properties command (Update Defaults).
              » Print Layout settings are affected when you use NPS files.

SEE ALSO

About printing,   » Index

Preview a Printed Document

PURPOSE       Before you print a document on paper, you can preview it on the
              screen to see how it will look.

STEPS         In a view, a note, the category manager, or the macro editor:
              1. F10 Print Preview
              2. Change the appropriate settings in the Print Preview box and
                 press ENTER.  Agenda then puts you in Preview mode and
                 displays the formatted document on the screen.

NOTES         » In order to use Print Preview, your computer must have a
                graphics display adapter card (specified during installation).
              » To specify a different graphics display adapter card:
                1. F10 Print Setup
                2. Fill in the Print Preview Display Driver setting.  (You
                   must specify a choice other than None.)
              » Print Preview settings are affected when you use NPS files.
              » To preview a document longer than 50 pages, you may need to
                increase the Maximum Memory for Printing.  Use the Utilities
                Customize command to change this setting.

SEE ALSO

About printing,   » Index

Print a Document

PURPOSE       Once you've formatted a document and (optionally) previewed how
              it will look, you're ready to print it.  Agenda lets you specify
              what info from the current file to print and where to print it
              (to a printer or a file).

STEPS         In a view, a note, the category manager, or the macro editor:
              1. F10 Print Final
              2. Change the appropriate settings in the Print Final box and
                 press ENTER.  The settings that appear depend on the part of
                 Agenda you're using.  For more info, see:
                  Final settings in a view
                  Final settings in the category manager
                  Final settings in the note/macro editor

NOTES         » Print Final settings are affected when you use NPS files.
              » To print a document longer than 50 pages, you may need to
                increase the Maximum Memory for Printing.  Use the Utilities
                Customize command to change this setting.

SEE ALSO

About printing,   » Index

Use a Print Settings File

PURPOSE       Once you enter Layout, Preview, and Final settings to print
              documents a particular way, you can save those settings in a
              named print settings (NPS) file for later use elsewhere.

USES          After you save an NPS file you can:
               Retrieve it in other Agenda files to replace their Layout,
                Preview, and Final print settings (for views, notes, the
                category manager, and the macro editor).
               Attach it to individual views in any Agenda file.  In this
                case, the NPS file's settings affect only the view they're
                attached to (they don't affect other views).

SAVE AN       In a view, a note, the category manager, or the macro editor:
NPS FILE      1. F10 Print Named Save
              2. Either:
                  Type the file name (including a path, if necessary).
                  Or, press F3 (CHOICES) to pick a file.
              By default, Agenda gives the file the extension NPS.

ABOUT THE     Once you save an NPS file, it contains the Layout, Preview, and
SAVED NPS     Final print settings from all parts of the current Agenda file
FILE          (view print settings, category manager print settings, and
              note/macro editor print settings).  It doesn't matter whether
              you're in a view, a note, the category manager, or the macro
              editor when you use the Print Named Save command.

              Remember that NPS files are stored separately from Agenda files.
              You can save as many NPS files as you need.

RETRIEVE AN   In a view, a note, the category manager, or the macro editor:
NPS FILE      1. F10 Print Named Retrieve
              2. Either:
                  Type the file name (including a path, if necessary).
                  Or, press F3 (CHOICES) to pick a file.
              Agenda uses the settings from this NPS file as the new defaults
              for the current Agenda file (doesn't affect views with attached
              NPS files).

ATTACH AN     1. Display the view to which you want to attach the NPS file.
NPS FILE      2. Select one of the following commands:
TO A VIEW         F10 Print Named Attach
                  Or, F10 View Properties and then highlight the Named Print
                   Set setting
              3. Enter the name of the NPS file using either of these methods:
                  Type the file name (including a path, if necessary).
                  Or, press F3 (CHOICES) to pick a file.
              Agenda uses the settings from this NPS file as the new defaults
              for the current view.

DETACH AN     If you don't want a view to be attached to an NPS file anymore:
NPS FILE      1. Display the view.
FROM A VIEW   2. Select one of the following commands:
                  F10 Print Named Detach
                  Or, F10 View Properties and then clear the Named Print Set
                   setting (press CTRL-ENTER)
              The view now uses the default print settings of the Agenda file.
              Note: Detaching doesn't delete the NPS file from disk.

ERASE AN      If you don't need a particular NPS file anymore, you can erase
NPS FILE      it from disk.

              In a view, a note, the category manager, or the macro editor:
              1. F10 Print Named Erase
              2. Either:
                  Type the file name (including a path, if necessary).
                  Or, press F3 (CHOICES) to pick a file.

              Important:  When you erase an NPS file, Agenda automatically
              detaches it from all views it was attached to in the current
              Agenda file.  If the erased NPS file is attached to views in
              other Agenda files, you are prompted to detach it when you
              work with those Agenda files.

SEE ALSO

About printing,   » Index

Manipulate a Category List

PURPOSE       Whenever Agenda displays a list of categories to select from,
              you can use this list to manipulate the category hierarchy
              before making your selection(s).  You can use a subset of the
              features from the category manager.

EXAMPLE       If you press F3 (CHOICES) while highlighting a Category Name
              setting in a dialog box, Agenda displays a list of categories.
              Before selecting a category for the setting, you can insert,
              delete, or modify categories.

HIGHLIGHT     To move the highlight from one category to another in the list:
MOVEMENT
              PRESS               TO MOVE THE HIGHLIGHT
              ------------------  --------------------------------------------
               or BACKSPACE      Up one category
                                 Down one category
              PGUP                Up one screen
              PGDN                Down one screen
              HOME                To parent of current family
              END                 To last child of current family

HIGHLIGHT     PRESS               TO MOVE THE HIGHLIGHT
MOVEMENT      ------------------  --------------------------------------------
              CTRL-PGUP           To previous sibling
              CTRL-PGDN           To next sibling
              CTRL-HOME           To first category in hierarchy (MAIN)
              CTRL-END            To last category in hierarchy

ADD A NEW     You can use these keys to add new categories to the hierarchy:
CATEGORY
              PRESS               TO ADD
              ------------------  --------------------------------------------
              INS or ALT-D        A new sibling category below the highlight
              or ALT-I

              ALT-U               A new sibling category above the highlight

              ALT-L               A new uncle of the highlighted category

              ALT-R               A new child of the highlighted category

MAKE OTHER    You can use these keys to manipulate existing categories:
CHANGES
              PRESS               IF YOU WANT TO
              ------------------  --------------------------------------------
              F2 (EDIT)           Change the name of highlighted category

              F6 (PROPS)          Change properties of highlighted category

              ALT-F4 (DISCARD)    Delete highlighted category from the file
              or DEL

EXPAND AND    You can use these keys to control how families of categories are
COLLAPSE      displayed in the hierarchy:
FAMILIES
              PRESS               IF YOU WANT TO
              ------------------  --------------------------------------------
              ALT -               Collapse the highlighted parent category to
                                  hide its children
              ALT +               Expand the highlighted parent category to
                                  display its children

About Agenda

PURPOSE       Agenda is a personal information manager that gives you control
              over facts, notes, names, plans, numbers, dates, and more.

USES          People use Agenda to accomplish such tasks as these:

               Track & refine ideas         Keep lists
               Collect meeting notes        Sift & analyze information
               Prepare plans                Schedule activities

HOW IT WORKS  Agenda collects many diverse pieces of information and then
              finds the connections among them.  So it can turn thousands of
              unrelated facts into a network of knowledge that you can view
              and manipulate from many perspectives.

BASIC STEPS   To use Agenda, you perform these basic steps:

              1. Enter items of information.
              2. Organize these items into categories.
              3. Display various views of these items and categories.

SEE ALSO

About files,   Use starter applications,   Add notes,   » Index

Starter Applications

PURPOSE       For your convenience, the Agenda package includes four
              applications that are ready for you to use.  They're called
              starter applications because they can get you started using
              Agenda right away.

WHAT THEY     STARTER APPLICATION   USE IT IF YOU WANT TO
ARE           --------------------  ------------------------------------------
              Planner               Track daily business activities, plan
                                    schedules, make contact lists, note ideas.
              Account               Track accounts in a sales/support
                                    environment, report on issues or progress.
              People                Track the goals/progress of people in an
                                    organization who report to you.
              Infosift              Organize and analyze info imported from
                                    external sources (such as CD-ROM).

TO USE        In a view:
THEM          1. F10 File Retrieve
              2. Type the path C:\AGENDA\APPS\ followed by the name of the
                 starter application you want (such as PLANNER).  Press ENTER.

About Indicators

PURPOSE       Agenda displays indicators on the screen to give you status
              messages and information about the current file.

MODE AND      Mode and message indicators are short, capitalized words that
MESSAGE       usually appear in the upper right corner of the control panel.
INDICATORS    They tell you about special processing modes you're using
              (example: EDIT) or give you status messages (example: WAIT).

SYMBOLS       Symbols are special characters (examples: jj, !!, t) that appear
              on various parts of the screen.  They primarily tell you about
              the characteristics of items and categories.

              The symbols you see depend on the part of Agenda you're using.
              For more info, see:
               View indicators
               Category manager indicators
               Macro manager indicators

              In addition to these symbols, you may see * in the view manager
              to indicate which views are datebook views.

Mode & Message Indicators

IF YOU SEE         IT MEANS
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
AUTOC              Agenda is using automatic completion to try to match what
                   you type with an existing category or choice.

BROWSE             You're browsing through a view by date (Browse mode).

DEBUG              You're debugging a macro.

DISK!              The disk is full (you need to obtain more disk space).
                   Agenda automatically turns off all conditions and actions.

DMGD!              The current Agenda file is damaged.  See Appendix I in the
                   User's Guide for recovery instructions.

EDIT               You're editing text (Edit mode) and can use editing keys.

INS                You're inserting characters (Insert mode) in the note/macro
                   editor.  INS is the opposite of OVR.

LEARN              You're recording keystrokes in a macro (Learn mode).

LIMIT!             The current Agenda file is approaching maximum size (about
                   5.5 megabytes).  You should avoid adding much more to it.

OVR                You're overwriting characters (Overwrite mode) in the
                   note/macro editor.  OVR is the opposite of INS.

READ ONLY          You're accessing an Agenda file from the network but don't
                   have a reservation. So you can read it but not write to it.

WAIT               Agenda is busy working on a task and must complete it
                   before starting another.

WRKG               Agenda is working on a task in the background.  You can
                   continue typing to do other work and Agenda interrupts the
                   background task to carry out your request.

SEE ALSO

About indicators,   » Index

View Indicators

IF YOU SEE    HERE                IT MEANS
------------  ------------------  --------------------------------------------
, , , ,   Control panel       You can scroll the screen in the direction
, or                            of the arrow(s) to see more.

             Left of item        The adjacent text is an item.  (To change
                                  item tag symbol, use Utilities Customize.)

t             Left of item        The item is marked for further processing.

              Control panel       The view contains marked items.

!!             Left of item        The item is designated as done.

j             Control panel       The highlighted item or category has a note.
              or left of item

jj             Control panel       The highlighted item or category has an
              or left of item     external note file attached.

@             Left of item        The item has an alarm.

              Control panel       An alarm has sounded in the file.  (To see
                                  it, use the Utilities Show Alarm command.)

&             Left of item        The item depends on completion of other
                                  item(s).  (To see the prerequisite items,
                                  use the Utilities Show Prereqs command.)

*             Control panel       The highlight is on a date category or a
                                  date value.

#             Control panel       The highlight is on a numeric category or
                                  a numeric value.

D             Control panel       The highlight is on an unindexed category
                                  or an unindexed value.

?             Control panel       File contains unconfirmed text assignments.
                                  (To confirm them, use Utilities Questions.)

§             Right of section    The section is collapsed and has items not
              head                currently shown.  (Press ALT + to expand the
                                  current section.)

*             Star column         Adjacent item is assigned to (or inherited
                                  by) the category used as the column head.

»             Left of item or     The item or category is currently selected.
              category

o             Control panel       File contains conditions and/or actions that
                                  lead to circular references.  (To see them,
                                  use the Utilities Show Circular command.)

*****         Numeric column      The number is too large to be displayed in
                                  this column.  (To increase the column width,
                                  use the View Column Width command.)

.....         Calculation area    No value is currently available for this
              of numeric column   calculation.

[Hide Empty]  Control panel       Empty sections (with no items) in view are
                                  not displayed.  (To display them, use the
                                  View Properties command.)

[Hide Done]   Control panel       Done items in view are not displayed.
                                  (To display them, use View Properties.)

[Hide         Control panel       Dependent items in view are not displayed.
Dependent]                        (To display them, use View Properties.)

[Hide         Control panel       Inherited items in view are not displayed.
Inherited]                        (To display them, use View Properties.)

[category]    Control panel or    The view or section has a filter that
              right of section    displays only those items assigned to this
              head                category.

                                  If it's a date or numeric filter, you may
                                  also see a value range.  For example:
                                  [when(todaytomorrow)]

[-category]   Control panel or    The view or section has a filter that
              right of section    displays only those items not assigned to
              head                this category.

SEE ALSO

About indicators,   » Index

Value Range Symbols

PURPOSE       When you use date/numeric filters, date/numeric conditions, or
              date/numeric actions, you can specify a range of values for
              them.  To display these ranges on the screen, Agenda uses the
              symbols shown below.

WHAT THEY     IF YOU SEE            THE RANGE OF VALID VALUES IS
ARE           --------------------  ------------------------------------------
              category(startend)   Greater than or equal to start AND less
                                    than or equal to end
              category(start)      Greater than or equal to start
              category(end)        Less than or equal to end
              category(value)       That value exactly
              category-(startend)  Less than start OR greater than end (in
                                    other words, not between start and end)
              category-(start)     Less than start
              category-(end)       Greater than end
              category-(value)      Any value except this one

SEE ALSO

Category manager indicators,   About indicators,   View indicators,   » Index

Category Manager Indicators

IF YOU SEE    HERE                IT MEANS
------------  ------------------  --------------------------------------------
j             Left of category    The category has a note.

jj             Left of category    The category has an external note file
                                  attached.

*             Left of category    This is a date category.

#             Left of category    This is a numeric category.

D             Left of category    This is an unindexed category.

+-            Left of category    The sibling categories in this grouping are
+-                                mutually exclusive.
+-
+-

¶             Right of category   The category is protected.

~¶            Right of category   The category is not protected.

?             Right of category   Agenda asks you to confirm some or all
                                  text assignments for this category.  (To
                                  confirm them, use Utilities Questions.)

~?            Right of category   Agenda makes text assignments to this
                                  category without asking for confirmation.

             Right of category   The category can't have new children.

~            Right of category   The category can have new children.

±             Right of category   If a new assignment to this category
                                  conflicts with an old assignment, Agenda
                                  keeps the old and ignores the new.

~±            Right of category   If a new assignment to this category
                                  conflicts with an old assignment, Agenda
                                  uses the new and breaks the old.

...           Right of category   This parent category is collapsed and has
                                  children not shown.  (Press ALT + to expand
                                  the highlighted category.)

A=            Right of category   The category has an assignment, date, or
                                  numeric action.

C=            Right of category   The category has an assignment, date, or
                                  numeric condition.

O or o        Right of category   Agenda executes this category's conditions
                                  only on demand (when you use the Utilities
                                  Execute command, ALT-E, or ALT-X).

N or n        Right of category   This category's conditions are disabled (so
                                  they are never executed).

             Right of category   You can't make explicit assignments to this
                                  category.

&             Right of category   An item must meet one of this category's
                                  text conditions AND one of its other
                                  conditions.

|             Right of category   An item must meet one of this category's
                                  text conditions OR one of its other
                                  conditions.

-category     Right of category   The condition applies to items not assigned
                                  to this category.  Or, the action breaks
                                  assignments of items to this category.

category      Right of category   The condition applies to items assigned to
                                  this category.  Or, the action assigns items
                                  to this category.
                                  If it's a date or numeric condition/action,
                                  you may also see a value range. For example:
                                  when(todaytomorrow)

S=            Right of category   The category has a special action.

Mark Done     Right of category   When an item is assigned to this category
                                  (or to one of its children), Agenda enters
                                  the current date as the item's Done date and
                                  marks the item done (!!).

Export        Right of category   When an item is assigned to this category
                                  (or to one of its children), Agenda saves
                                  the item in a structured text file.

Discard       Right of category   When an item is assigned to this category
                                  (or to one of its children), Agenda puts the
                                  item in the trash.

T=            Right of category   The category has a text condition.

n%            Right of category   Text matches must be this strong in order
                                  for items to be assigned to the category.

Both          Right of category   Agenda searches both an item & its note
                                  for text that matches this category.

Item          Right of category   Agenda searches only the item itself for
                                  text that matches this category.

Note          Right of category   Agenda searches only the item's note for
                                  text that matches this category.

( )           In text condition   Agenda matches only text that has same word
                                  order as text enclosed in parentheses.

;             In text condition   Indicates how 2 text conditions are related:
                                  Items must match one OR the other.

,             In text condition   Indicates how 2 text conditions are related:
                                  Items must match both (one AND the other).

" "           In text condition   Agenda ignores the enclosed text when
                                  searching for matches.

^             In text condition   Agenda matches the following text only if
                                  words have the same suffixes.

~             In text condition   Agenda matches the following text only
                                  if case (uppercase/lowercase) is the same.

!             In text condition   The text following ! can't be in the match
                                  text.  (Agenda matches text that doesn't
                                  include this unwanted text.)

\             In text condition   The text following \ is a control character
                                  that Agenda treats as regular text.

?             In text condition   Agenda matches any single character to this
                                  wild card.

*             In text condition   Agenda matches any string of 0 or more
                                  characters to this wild card.

WHAT YOU      The category manager doesn't display symbols for features that
WON'T SEE     are set to the global default, only for features you've set
              locally for a category.  Use the Category Properties command
              to check these settings for a particular category.

TO HIDE       You can choose to hide or display condition/action symbols in
INDICATORS    the category manager.  Here's what to do:

               ALT-F7 (SHOWC/A)

              Tip:  You can also do this (from a view) by using the Utilities
              Customize command.

SEE ALSO

About indicators,   » Index

Quit Agenda

PURPOSE       When you finish using Agenda, you can go back to the operating
              system by quitting.

STEPS         In a view, a note, the category manager, or the macro editor,
              do either of the following:

               F10 Quit
               Or, ALT-Q

RESULT        Agenda automatically saves the current file and then ends your
              current session.  The operating system appears on the screen.

NOTE          If you want to quit Agenda without saving your changes to the
              current file, first use the File Abandon command.

SEE ALSO

Suspend a session,   » Index

Suspend a Session

PURPOSE       You can leave Agenda temporarily without ending your current
              session.  This enables you to use the operating system or run
              another program and then resume your Agenda session.

GO TO THE     In a view:
OPERATING     1. F10 System
SYSTEM           Agenda automatically saves the current file and then suspends
                 your session.  The operating system appears on the screen.
              2. Enter the operating system command(s) you want to perform.
              3. To resume your Agenda session, type EXIT and press ENTER.

RUN ANOTHER   In a view:
PROGRAM       1. F10 Utilities Launch
              2. Type the name of the program to run (including the path, if
                 necessary) and press ENTER.  Agenda automatically saves the
                 current file and suspends your session.  Then it runs the
                 specified program.
              3. When done with the launched program, exit from it as you
                 normally would.  Your Agenda session resumes automatically.

NOTES         » If you want to suspend your session without saving your
                changes to the current file, first use the File Abandon
                command.

              » During a suspended session, don't run terminate-and-stay-
                resident (TSR) programs (such as Lotus Metro).

              » Also, don't use memory-resident DOS commands (such as
                PRINT.COM or MODE.COM) unless you load them before starting
                Agenda.

SEE ALSO

Quit Agenda,   » Index

Access a Network

PURPOSE       If your computer is attached to a local area network (LAN), you
              can share Agenda files with other network users.

GET           Before working with network files in Agenda, you need to know:
STARTED
               How to connect to the network
               What path to type in Agenda when saving and retrieving
                network files

              Ask your network administrator for assistance.

ACCESS        Once you're connected, you work with network files using the
FILES         same commands that you use for local files.  For example:

               To retrieve a network file:  F10 File Retrieve
               To save a network file:      F10 File Save

              While you use network files you also need to know about a
              feature called file reservations.

ABOUT FILE    Agenda uses file reservations to control who can read or save
RESERVATIONS  a particular file at a given moment:

               If you just want to read a file (Read-Only mode), you don't
                need a reservation for it.  Multiple users can read a file at
                the same time.

               If you want to save a file, you must have a reservation for
                it.  Only one user at a time can have the reservation for a
                particular file.  (This ensures that one user doesn't write
                over the changes of another user.)

AUTOMATIC     When you retrieve a file that no other users are currently
RESERVATION   accessing, Agenda automatically gets you the reservation for
              that file.  If someone else already has the reservation,
              Agenda retrieves the file in Read-Only mode.

RELEASE THE   Agenda automatically releases your file reservation if you quit
RESERVATION   Agenda, retrieve a different file, or save the file to a new
              file name.  You can also release the reservation yourself (if
              you aren't going to save the file but another user wants to).

              In a view:
               F10 File Maintenance Reservation

IF YOU DON'T  For some files, you may not want Agenda to automatically get you
WANT AN       a reservation.  For example, you may often retrieve the network
AUTOMATIC     file ACCOUNTS just to read it, but you never save it.  For a
RESERVATION   file like this, you can make Agenda ask you (whenever you
              retrieve the file) whether or not to get the reservation for it.

              In a view:
              1. Retrieve the file.
              2. F10 File Properties
              3. Change the Get Reservation setting from Automatically to
                 Manually.  Then press ENTER.

GET THE       If you're currently accessing a file in Read-Only mode but want
RESERVATION   to save it, you can try to get the reservation.
MANUALLY
              In a view:
               F10 File Maintenance Reservation

              If no other user has the reservation, Agenda gets it for you.
              You can now make changes to the file and save it.

              Caution:  Avoid making changes until after you get the
              reservation.  Otherwise, your changes may conflict with those
              of another user and prevent you from getting the reservation.

Erase a File

PURPOSE       You can erase an Agenda file from disk if you no longer need it.

STEPS         In a view:

              1. F10 File Maintenance Erase
              2. Either:
                  Highlight the file name in the list.
                  Or, type the file name (including a path, if necessary).
              3. Press ENTER.

RESULT        This command erases the Agenda file (extension .AG) from disk.
              But it does not erase the backup file (extension .BG).  Tip: If
              you want to erase the backup file, repeat the steps above.

NOTE          You can't erase the file you're currently using.

SEE ALSO

Select a file,   » Index

File Size Limits

PROBLEM       If your Agenda file approaches the maximum size (about 5.5
              megabytes), Agenda displays the LIMIT! indicator in the upper
              right corner of the screen.  This means you can't add much more
              to the file.

SOLUTIONS     To reduce the size of this file you can do any of the following:

               Clear deleted items from the trash: F10 Utilities Trash

               Compress the file to recover unused space:
                F10 File Maintenance Compress

               Discard done (!!) items or export them to a structured file:
                F10 File Properties (Global Date Settings)

               Store notes and macros in external text files:
                F10 Export and then F10 File Attach

               Break the file into 2 or more smaller files:
                F10 File Transfer Export/Import

Import/Export Information

PURPOSE       You can get information in and out of Agenda by importing and
              exporting.  This enables you to work with information from many
              different sources and share information with other programs.

TYPES OF      Agenda lets you import and export information in several
IMPORT AND    different ways.  You can:
EXPORT
               Import/export structured text (STF) files

               Copy the structure of an Agenda file

               Copy an entire Agenda file

               Import/export note text

               Import/export macro text

SEE ALSO

Save an Agenda file,   Retrieve an Agenda file,   » Index

Copy the Structure of an Agenda File

PURPOSE       You can copy (export) the complete structure of the current
              Agenda file to a new Agenda file.  The new Agenda file contains
              the category hierarchy, views, macros, conditions, and actions
              of the original file, but no items or assignments.

              This enables you to create a template of the current file and
              give it to other users who want to enter their own items.

STEPS         In a view:
              1. Retrieve the Agenda file whose structure you want to copy.
              2. F10 File Transfer Template
              3. Specify the new (or existing) Agenda file to which the
                 structure will be copied.  Either:
                  Highlight the file name in the list.
                  Or, type the file name (including a path, if necessary).

NOTES         » If you copy the structure to an existing Agenda file, the
                previous contents of that file are overwritten.
              » The current Agenda file is not affected by this command.

SEE ALSO

Select a file,   About importing/exporting,   » Index

Import/Export STF Files

PURPOSE       You can use structured text (STF) files to import items,
              categories, and other info from outside sources into an Agenda
              file.  You can also use STF files to export items, categories,
              and other info from one Agenda file to another.

WHAT YOU      The outside sources from which you can import info include:
CAN IMPORT     Word processing documents    Lotus Metro List Manager files
               Electronic mail              The Agenda Items accessory
               News wire services           Info exported from Agenda files

STEPS FOR     1. Create an STF file from the outside source.  See the next
IMPORT           Help screen (press PGDN).

              2. In a view, retrieve the Agenda file into which you want to
                 import info from the STF file.

              3. F10 File Transfer Import

              4. Fill in the Import Structured File box and press ENTER.

CREATE AN     The procedure for creating an STF file depends on the source of
STF FILE      the info you want to import:

              SOURCE                 HOW TO CREATE STF FILE
              ---------------------  -----------------------------------------
              A text file            Use the TXT2STF conversion utility. See
                                     Chapter 23 in the User's Guide and the
                                     Working with Definition Files book.

              A Lotus Metro List     Use the LM2STF conversion utility.  See
              Manager file           Chapter 23 in the User's Guide.

              Items you enter in     Use the Transfer command in the Items
              the Items accessory    accessory.  See Appendix C in the User's
                                     Guide.

              An Agenda file         Use the File Transfer Export command.
                                     See the next Help screen (press PGDN).

WHAT AN       The STF file you create contains info in the form of items,
STF FILE      assignments, categories, and notes separated by tags.  It also
CONTAINS      contains tags that specify dates, numbers, conditions, actions,
              and other structural info.

STEPS FOR     One way to create an STF file is to export particular items,
EXPORT        categories, and other info from an existing Agenda file.

              In a view:
              1. Retrieve the Agenda file whose info you want to export.
              2. F10 File Transfer Export
              3. Fill in the Export Structured File box and press ENTER.

              Now you can use the exported info in another Agenda file by
              importing this STF file.

SEE ALSO

About importing/exporting,   » Index

Add a Column

PURPOSE        You can add a column to display category assignments or other
               values (numbers, dates, or text) for items in a view.  The type
               of category that heads the column determines the contents of
               the column.  A column can also display information related to
               categories, such as category notes.

STEPS          In a view:
               1. Place the highlight in an existing column beside which the
                  new column is to appear.
               2. F10 View Column Add
               3. Select a column head and fill in other settings in the
                  Column Add box.

SHORTCUT       For Step 2, press ALT-R (for a column to the right) or ALT-L
               (for a column to the left) and select a column head.  Defaults
               are used for the other column settings.

RESULT         If the column head is an existing category, any previous
               assignments for items in the view are displayed.

Modify Column Properties

PURPOSE        You can change various features of a column, such as its
               position in the view or its format.  For numeric columns, you
               can also change which calculations display.

STEPS          In a view:

               1. Highlight anywhere in the column you want to change.
               2. F10 View Column Properties
               3. Change any settings in the Column Properties box and press
                  ENTER.  The settings that appear depend on the type of
                  column it is.  For more info, see:

                   Item column properties
                   Standard column properties
                   Numeric column properties
                   Date column properties
                   Unindexed column properties

SHORTCUT       Highlight the column head and press F6 (PROPS).

Adjust the Column Width

PURPOSE        You can widen or narrow any column.  You can adjust the width
               for the column in all sections or just in one section.

LIMITS          Category columns: from 1 to 76 characters wide.
                Item columns: from 5 to 77 characters wide.

STEPS          TO ADJUST           DO THIS
               ------------------  -------------------------------------------
               All columns in      1. Highlight anywhere in the column.
               the view            2. F10 View Column Width
                                   3. Follow the prompts.

               A column in just    1. Highlight the column in the section.
               one section         2. F10 View Column Properties
                                   3. Set Link with Other Sections to No.
                                   4. Enter a number for Width.

NOTES          » To use the second method to change the width for all columns
                 in the view, set Link with Other Sections to Yes.
               » You can also adjust width in the Column Add box.

Remove a Column

PURPOSE        You can take a column out of a view.  This does not affect
               any category assignments for the items in the view.  You can
               replace the column by adding it again.

NOTE           You can't remove the item column from a view.

STEPS          In a view:

               1. Highlight anywhere in the column.
               2. F10 View Column Remove

               If Agenda asks if you want to remove the column from all
               sections or only the current section:
                Make your choice and press ENTER.

SHORTCUT       Highlight the column head and press DEL.

SEE ALSO

Break an item's assignment,   » Index

Create a File

PURPOSE        You can create your own Agenda file.

STEPS          In a view:
               1. F10 File Retrieve
               2. Press INS and type a new file name.
               3. Follow the prompts.

NOTE           If you have just loaded Agenda, start at Step 2.

SHORTCUT       Instead of the menu command, press ALT-G and type a file name.

RESULTS        If a file is open, Agenda saves it.  Every new file contains:
                One view, called Initial View
                One section, called Initial Section
                Five categories:
                 - MAIN (the ancestor of all other categories)
                 - When, Done, and Entry (date categories)
                 - Initial Section (the name of the only section)
               You'll usually want to change the names of Initial View and
               Initial Section to be more meaningful in your application.

Description and Password for a New File

PURPOSE        When you create a new file, Agenda prompts you to enter a
               one-line description and a password.  The description helps
               you identify the file contents.  The password lets you control
               who can open the file.

WHAT YOU       Both description and password are optional.  If you give the
CAN DO         file a password, you must enter it each time you open the file.

               IF YOU WANT TO      DO THIS
               ------------------  -------------------------------------------
               Omit description    Press ENTER at the prompt without supplying
               or password when    any information.
               creating a file

               Change description  1. F10 File Properties
               or password for     2. Change the description and/or password
               an existing file       setting.

Retrieve an Existing File

PURPOSE        You can open any existing file while you are in Agenda.  You
               can have only one file open at a time.

STEPS          In a view:
               1. F10 File Retrieve
               2. Highlight the name of the file you want and press ENTER.

SHORTCUT       Instead of the menu command, press ALT-G.  Type the file name
               or highlight the file you want.  Then press ENTER.

WHEN YOU       If you just loaded Agenda, you see the File Retrieve box. Press
START AGENDA   F3 (CHOICES) and start at Step 2.  (If you want to create a new
               file, just type its name and press ENTER.)

RESULTS        Agenda displays the file, showing the view you were in
               the last time you used the file.  If another file is open
               when you retrieve a file, the first file is automatically
               saved.

SEE ALSO

Select a file,   » Index

Save a File

PURPOSE        You can save the current file at any time while you are using
               Agenda.

STEPS          In a view:

               1. F10 File Save
               2. Fill in the Save box and press ENTER.

NOTES          » Agenda saves your file automatically when you retrieve
                 another file, print, suspend, or quit Agenda.

               » The Utilities Customize command lets you tell Agenda whether
                 to save the file automatically at regular intervals while you
                 have the file open.

SHORTCUT       Instead of the menu command, press ALT-W.

SEE ALSO

Select a file,   » Index

Back Up a File

PURPOSE        You can have Agenda automatically make a backup of a file each
               time you retrieve the file and when you issue the Save command.
               Making regular backups is your best protection against the
               loss of information that can occur if a file is corrupted.

STEPS          In a view:

               AUTOMATIC BACKUPS               WHILE SAVING
               ------------------------------  -------------------------------
               1. F10 File Properties          1. F10 File Save
               2. Highlight the Make           2. Be sure the Also Save
                  Backup on Open setting.         Backup setting is Yes.
               3. Type Y and press ENTER.      3. Press ENTER.

RETRIEVE       To retrieve a backup file:
A BACKUP       1. F10 File Retrieve
               2. Highlight the file name.
               3. Press F6 (EXPAND) to display all versions of the file.
               4. Select the version of the file with the extension .BG.

SEE ALSO

Select a file,   » Index

Abandon a File

PURPOSE        You can undo the changes you made to a file and restore the
               previous version.

STEP           In a view:
                F10 File Abandon

CHOICES         Type N to cancel the Abandon command and keep the file (with
                 the changes intact).
                Type Y to abandon the current version of the file and
                 retrieve the last saved version.

RESULTS        If you type Y, Agenda permanently discards all changes you
               made to the file since the last time it was saved and displays
               the previous version of the file.  If you type N or press ESC,
               you are canceling the command.

Copy a File

PURPOSE        You can copy the contents of any Agenda file to a new file.
               Then you can modify this copy without affecting the original.

STEPS          In a view:
               1. F10 File Maintenance MakeCopy
               2. Specify the file to copy to.  Either:
                   Press INS and type a new file name (and path, if needed).
                   Or, highlight an existing file.
               3. Press ENTER.

RESULTS        Agenda saves the highlighted file to the new file.  You have
               an exact duplicate of the original file.  The two files are
               independent of each other.  The original file is still the open
               file.  To retrieve the copied file, issue the File Retrieve
               command and pick the file from the Select File list.

NOTE           You can make automatic backups, rather than a copy, if what
               you want is a second version of the file to safeguard against
               loss of information.

SEE ALSO

Select a file,   » Index

Enter Items

PURPOSE        Enter the information you want to organize by typing short
               items.  An item can be up to 350 characters long.

STEPS          In a view:

               1. Highlight anywhere in the item column.

               2. Type an item and press ENTER.

SHORTCUT       Press ALT-I from any column to move to the item column.

Edit Items and Categories

PURPOSE        You can change the text of an item or a category name at any
               time.

STEPS          In a view:

               1. Highlight the item or category you want to edit.
               2. F2 (EDIT)
               3. Change the text and press ENTER.

NOTES          » When you press F2, you enter Edit mode.  The function keys
                 perform editing functions, such as cut and paste.

               » When you edit an item or category, you change it everywhere
                 it appears in the file.

Discard an Item

PURPOSE        When you no longer want an item to be part of your file, you
               can permanently discard it.

STEPS          In a view:
               1. Highlight the item.
               2. F10 Item Discard

SHORTCUT       Highlight the item and press ALT-F4 (DISCARD).

NOTES          » Agenda puts discarded items in the trash.  You can retrieve
                 discarded items until you empty the trash.

               » You can mark a group of items and discard them all at the
                 same time.

               » When you discard an item, you also break all of the item's
                 assignments to categories.

SEE ALSO

Undiscard an item,   » Index

Undiscard an Item

PURPOSE        If you change your mind about permanently discarding an item
               from the file, you can undiscard it as long as it remains in
               the trash. Once the trash is emptied however, the item is gone.

STEPS          In a view:
               1. Place the highlight in the section where you want to display
                  this item.
               2. F10 Item Undisc

NOTE           If there are multiple items in the trash, Agenda asks if you
               want to undiscard all items or only the last one.  If you
               want just some of the items:

               1. Choose to undiscard all items.
               2. Mark the items you don't want.
               3. Discard the marked items as a group.

RESULTS        Agenda displays the item(s) and assigns them to the section
               head category (but other assignments aren't restored).

SEE ALSO

Discard an item,   » Index

Break an Item's Assignment

PURPOSE        You can break an item's assignment to a category by removing
               either the category or the item.

STEPS          TO BREAK AN ITEM'S
               ASSIGNMENT TO          DO THIS (IN A VIEW)
               ---------------------  ----------------------------------------
               A category in a        1. Highlight the column entry category
               column entry              to which you no longer want the item
                                         assigned.
                                      2. Press DEL (or F10 Item BrkAssign).
                                         The category is removed but the item
                                         remains.

               The category used      1. Highlight the item you want to
               as the section head       unassign from the section head.
                                      2. Press DEL (or F10 Item BrkAssign).
                                         The item is removed from the section.
                                         It remains part of the file as long
                                         as it has other category assignments.

SEE ALSO

Discard an item,   Assignment profile,   » Index

Mark or Unmark Items

PURPOSE        By marking items, you can work with them as a group.  For
               example, you can discard them all, assign them to the same
               category(s), move them, and so on.

STEP            Highlight an item you want in the group and press F7 (MARK).

RESULTS        Agenda changes the item tag to a diamond (t).  To work with
               the items as a group, just select the command (such as Item
               Discard).  Agenda asks if you want to perform the command on
               the marked items or just the current item.

UNMARKING      If you change your mind, it's easy to unmark items:

               TO UNMARK                     DO THIS
               ----------------------------  ---------------------------------
               One marked item               1. Highlight the item.
                                             2. Press F7 (MARK).

               All marked items              1. Highlight anywhere in view.
                                             2. Press ALT-F7 (UNMKALL).

Move Sections, Columns, or Items

PURPOSE     You can change the order of sections, columns, or items in a view.

STEPS       TO MOVE             DO THIS (IN A VIEW)
            ------------------  ----------------------------------------------
            Section             1. Highlight anywhere in the section.
                                2. F10 View Section Move

            Column              1. Highlight anywhere in the column.
                                2. F10 View Column Move

            Item within a       1. Highlight the item.
            section             2. F10 Item Reposition

            Items within a      1. Highlight the item or mark items.
            section or to       2. ALT-F10 (MOVE)
            another section     Tips: Agenda arranges marked items in the same
                                order in which you mark them.  If you move
                                items to the section they're already in,
                                Agenda places them after the highlight.

            For each procedure, follow the instructions at the top of screen.

Add a Section

PURPOSE        You can add a section anywhere in a view to display a group of
               items and columns.

STEPS          In a view:
               1. Highlight anywhere in the section adjacent to where you want
                  to add a new section.
               2. F10 View Section Add
               3. Enter a category for the section head and fill in other
                  settings in the Section Add box.

SHORTCUT       For Step 2, press ALT-D and select a section head.  Defaults
               are used for the other section settings.

ALTERNATE      To add a section above the current section, press ALT-U and
               enter a section head.

RESULT         Agenda displays the new section in the view.  If the section
               head is an existing category, any items previously assigned to
               the section head category are displayed in the section.

SEE ALSO

Use child categories as section heads,   » Index

Change Properties of a Section

PURPOSE        You can change any feature of a section, such as its position
               in the view or its item-sorting criteria.

STEPS          In a view:

               1. Highlight anywhere in the section you want to change.

               2. F10 View Section Properties

               3. Change any settings in the Section Properties box and
                  press ENTER.

SHORTCUT       Highlight the section head and press F6 (PROPS).

Add a View

PURPOSE        You can add a view to show your information from a different
               perspective.  In each view you can organize information by
               any of the categories in your file.  You can also use filters
               to control which items display in the view.

STEPS          In a view:

               1. F10 View Add
               2. Type a unique name for the view.
               3. Highlight the Section setting.
               4. Press F3 (CHOICES) to choose one or more section heads.
               5. Fill in other settings and press ENTER.

RESULTS        Agenda displays the new view with the section heads you chose.
               You can add columns and enter items.  The new view is added to
               the list of views in the view manager.

SEE ALSO

Add a section,   Use child categories as section heads,   » Index

Enter Categories

PURPOSE        Enter a category in a column to make an assignment for an item.

STEPS          In a view:

               1. Highlight the column entry position across from the item.

               2. Either:
                   Press F3 (CHOICES) and highlight an existing category.
                   Or, type a new category name.

               3. Press ENTER.

ALTERNATE      At Step 2, you can type the category name (new or existing)
               instead of pressing F3.  To use automatic completion to match
               existing categories, press ENTER when the category you want
               displays at the top of the screen.  To override a match, just
               keep typing.

SEE ALSO

Select a category,   » Index

Create a Date Category

PURPOSE        You can create date categories in addition to the three that
               Agenda automatically creates for every file.

STEPS          In a view:

               1. F10 Category Add

               2. Enter a name in the Category Name setting.

               3. Set Type to Date.

NOTES          » When you use a date category as a column head, you can enter
                 only dates and times as values.

               » You can't convert a date category to any other category type.

SEE ALSO

About categories,   Enter dates & times,   » Index

Edit Categories

PURPOSE        You can edit the category name or change just one occurrence.

WHAT YOU       GOAL           STEPS (IN A VIEW)           RESULT
CAN DO         -------------  --------------------------  --------------------
               Edit the       1. Highlight the category.  Every occurrence of
               category name  2. F2 (EDIT)                the category name
                              3. Change the category      changes.
                                 name and press ENTER.

               Replace a      1. Highlight the category.  Only this occurrence
               category       2. DEL (and ENTER to        of the category
                                 confirm)                 changes.  The
                              3. Change category name     original category
                                 or press F3 (CHOICES).   name isn't affected.
                                 Then press ENTER.

NOTE           You can also edit the category name in the category manager and
               in any Select Category box.

SEE ALSO

Select a category,   » Index

Select a Category

PURPOSE        You can select from the category hierarchy when you need a
               category for a section or column head, column entry, filter,
               condition, action, etc.

WHAT YOU       GOAL           STEPS (IN A VIEW)
CAN DO         -------------  ------------------------------------------------
               Select an      1. Highlight a column entry position or category
               existing          setting in a box.
               category       2. Press F3 and highlight the category you want.
                              3. Follow the prompt on the top line of the
                                 screen to pick one or more categories.

               Select a new   1. Highlight a column entry position or category
               category          setting in a box.
                              2. Type the new category name.

ALTERNATE      When you want an existing category, you can type the category
               name instead of pressing F3.  Press ENTER when the category you
               want displays at the top of the screen.

SEE ALSO

Manipulate a category list,   » Index

Discard a Category

PURPOSE        You can remove a category completely from the file.

STEPS          In a view or the category manager:

               1. Highlight the category.

               2. ALT-F4 (DISCARD)

NOTE           If the category has assignments, Agenda asks you to confirm
               that you want to discard.

ALTERNATE      Instead of pressing ALT-F4 at Step 2, you can press F10 (MENU)
               and issue the Category Discard command.

Assign an Item to a Category

PURPOSE        Organize items of information by assigning them to categories.
               You can assign items to as many categories as you want.

STEPS          MAKE THE ASSIGNMENT                TO THIS CATEGORY
               ---------------------------------  ----------------------------
               Type a new item, or copy/move      Section head
               an item to a section

               Enter a category in a column       Column entry
               adjacent to an item

EXAMPLE        This item is assigned to Meetings (section head) and Room 118
               (column entry):
                    Meetings                        Where
                       Staff meeting Fri 3:30      · Room 118

NOTE           When you enter an item, Agenda assigns it an Entry date (the
               current date and time).  If you designate an item as done,
               Agenda assigns it a Done date (the current date and time).

OTHER          You can use these methods to make assignments for the
ASSIGNMENT     highlighted item:
METHODS
               COMMAND           SHORTCUT     DO THIS
               ----------------  -----------  --------------------------------
               Item MakeAssign   ALT-M        Type a category or press
                                              F3 (CHOICES)

               Item Properties   F6 (PROPS)   Type a category or press
               (Assigned To                   F3 (CHOICES)
               setting)

               F3 (assignment                 Highlight category(s) and press
               profile)                       SPACEBAR to assign the item

NOTE           You can also use conditions and actions to make automatic
               assignments.

SEE ALSO

Break an item's assignment,   Enter dates & times,   » Index

Enter a Note

PURPOSE        A note lets you add additional information to an item or a
               category.  You enter, read, and edit these notes on a separate
               screen from the view.

STEPS          In a view or the category manager:
               1. Highlight the item or category.
               2. F5 (NOTE)
               3. Type the note and press F5 to return to the view.
               A j appears by each item or category with a note.

CATEGORY       For a parent category, such as People, you might want the
NOTES          category note to contain a generic label, such as Phone # or
               Address.  Then you can enter specific information in notes for
               child categories, such as 555-1212 for Jane.  By using the
               category note Phone # as a column title, you can display each
               phone number as a column entry.

               Category notes can also be long text, such as a plan for
               Project X attached as a note to the category Project X.

SEE ALSO

Attach an external file as a note,   Note editor,   » Index

Use a Category Note as a Column Head

PURPOSE        You can display information from category notes, such as phone
               numbers, in a column.  To do so, use the category to which the
               note is attached (such as People) as the head for one column
               and the note (such as Phone #) as the title for another column.
               Once you set up the category note column, you can add the note
               information directly in that column.

STEPS          In a view:
                F10 View Column Add, then fill in these settings:

                 SETTING        PRESS   DO THIS
                 -------------  ------  --------------------------------------
                 Column head    F3      Pick the category with the note
                 Format         F3      Select Category Note
                 Column title           Type the note topic (e.g., Phone #)
                                        to display above the column
                 Line number            Type the line of the note that will
                                        contain the specific information
                                        (a note can have many lines -- e.g.,
                                        line 1 for phone #, 2 for address)

Sort Sections in a View

PURPOSE        You can sort section heads alphabetically, in numeric order, or
               in the same order that the section head categories appear in
               the category hierarchy.

STEPS          In a view:

               1. F10 View Add (or View Properties for an existing view)
               2. Highlight Section Sorting.
               3. Press F3 (CHOICES).
               4. Select the type of sorting you want and press ENTER.

NOTE           By default the sort is ascending order (such as A to Z).  To
               reverse this order, change the Order setting to Descending.

RESULTS        All sections in the view are sorted.  All sections you add from
               now on are displayed in sorted order.

SEE ALSO

About sorting,   » Index

Sort Items

PURPOSE        You can sort all items in each section of a view or in just
               one section.  By using section sorting, you can apply different
               sorting criteria for different sections of a view.

STEPS          1. In a view, either:
                   Set item sorting for all sections in view: F10 View Add
                    (View Properties for existing views)
                   Or, set item sorting for one section: F10 View Section Add
                    (Section Properties for existing sections)

               2. Highlight Item Sorting and press SPACEBAR.  Then:

                  TO SORT                 PICK THESE SETTINGS
                  ----------------------  ------------------------------------
                  Alphabetically by item  Sort On:  Item Text

                  Alphabetically by a     Sort On:  Category
                  category                Category: F3 to pick a category
                                          Sequence: Alphabetic

STEPS            TO SORT                 PICK THESE SETTINGS
                 ----------------------  -------------------------------------
                 By the order in the     Sort On:  Category
                 category hierarchy      Category: F3 to pick a category
                                         Sequence: Category Hierarchy

                 Date order              Sort On:  Category
                                         Category: F3 to pick date category
                                         Sequence: Date

                 Numeric order           Sort On:  Category
                                         Category: F3 to pick numeric category
                                         Sequence: Numeric

                 Alphabetically by       Sort On:  Category Note
                 the contents of a       Category: F3 to pick a category
                 category note           Sequence: Alphabetic

NOTES          » To sort from the beginning to the end of any sequence (such
                 as A to Z for Alphabetic), set Order to Ascending. Descending
                 sorts from end to beginning.

               » You can create other types of sorts by combining the sort
                 settings.  For example, to sort items by zip codes that
                 you entered as line 4 in category notes, use these settings:

                 Sort On:     Category Note
                 Line number: 4
                 Category:    Press F3 to pick the category with notes.
                 Sequence:    Numeric

SEE ALSO

About sorting,   » Index

Attach a Filter

PURPOSE        You can choose a category to attach as a filter to a view or
               section to limit which items display.

STEPS          In a view:

               1. Either:
                   Attach a view filter: F10 View Properties
                    (View Add for a new view)
                   Or, attach a section filter: F10 View Section Properties
                    (Section Add for a new section)

               2. Highlight the Filter setting and press F3 (CHOICES).

               3. Highlight the category for the filter and press SPACEBAR:
                   Once to display only items assigned to that category
                   Twice to exclude items assigned to that category
                  If the category is date or numeric, another box displays.

               4. Press ENTER.

RESULTS        When you set a filter, Agenda displays the filter category in
               brackets next to the section head or the view name at the top
               of the screen.  Items that don't meet the filter criteria are
               not displayed.

NOTES          » You can set a compound filter by choosing more than one
                 category for the filter.  In this case, items must pass the
                 criteria in each filter before they can display.
               » You can also set date or numeric filters.
               » In Step 3 you choose the filter value.  The symbol for this
                 value displays in the left column in the Filter box:

                 VALUE         SYMBOL    EFFECT ON VIEW/SECTION
                 ------------  --------  -------------------------------------
                 Assigned      +         Items display only if they are
                                         assigned to the filter category.

                 Not assigned  -         Items display only if they AREN'T
                                         assigned to the filter category.

SEE ALSO

Clear a filter,   Change the value of a filter,   » Index

Attach a Numeric Filter

PURPOSE        You can attach a numeric filter to a view or section to limit
               which items display.  Numeric filters are standard filters with
               another feature: ranges.

RANGES         When the filter is to display items that are assigned to the
               numeric filter category, you:

                Set a RANGE of values for the numeric filter (such as all
                 numbers between 1 and 25)
                Choose whether to include items that are inside or outside
                 the range

               For example, you can display items assigned to the numeric
               category Cost only if the value assigned is outside the range
               1 through 25 (which would display an item with a cost of $26,
               but not one of $15).

STEPS          In a view:
               1. Attach the filter to either a view or section:
                   F10 View Properties (View Add for a new view)
                   Or, F10 View Section Properties (Section Add for a new
                    section)
               2. Highlight the Filter setting and press F3 (CHOICES).
               3. Highlight a numeric category for filter and press SPACEBAR.
               4. Choose whether items will display if they are or are not
                  assigned to the numeric category filter.
               5. If you choose Assigned, you can also choose:
                   A range for the numeric filter (type numbers for Minimum
                    and Maximum Values)
                   Whether numbers assigned to the filter category for each
                    item should be inside or outside the range you set

NOTE           If you choose Assigned in Step 4 and you don't set a range,
               all items assigned to the numeric category are displayed.

RESULTS        Agenda displays the filter category (and the range, if any) in
               brackets next to the view name or section head.

Attach a Date Filter

PURPOSE        You can attach a date filter to a view or section to limit
               which items display.  Date filters are standard filters with
               another feature: ranges.

RANGES         When the filter is to display items that are assigned to the
               date filter category, you:

                Set a RANGE of dates for the date filter (such as all dates
                 between 8/26/91 and 8/28/91)
                Choose whether to include items that are inside or outside
                 the range

               For example, you can attach a filter to a view to display items
               only if the When date assigned is inside the range 6/14/91 to
               6/17/91 (which would filter out any item with a When date not
               in the range).

STEPS          In a view:
               1. Attach the filter to either a view or section:
                   F10 View Properties (View Add for a new view)
                   Or, F10 View Section Properties (Section Add for a new
                    section)
               2. Highlight the Filter setting and press F3 (CHOICES).
               3. Highlight the date category for filter and press SPACEBAR.
               4. Choose whether items will display if they are or are not
                  assigned to the date category filter.
               5. If you choose Assigned, you can also choose:
                   A range for the date filter (enter dates for Start Date
                    and End Date)
                   Whether dates assigned to the filter category for each
                    item should be inside or outside the range you set

NOTE           If you choose Assigned in Step 4 and you don't set a range,
               all items assigned to the date category are displayed.

RESULTS        Agenda displays the filter category (and the range, if any) in
               brackets next to the view name or section head.

Change a Filter

PURPOSE        You can use a filter in a view or section to:
                Display only items assigned to the filter category
                Or, exclude items assigned to the filter category
               You can change from an inclusive to an exclusive filter by
               changing the filter value:

               FILTER VALUE   SYMBOL   EFFECT ON VIEW/SECTION
               -------------  -------  ---------------------------------------
               Assigned       +        Items display only if they are assigned
                                       to the filter category.
               Not assigned   -        Items display only if they AREN'T
                                       assigned to the filter category.

STEPS          In a view:
               1. F10 View Properties (if it's a view filter) or
                  F10 View Section Properties (if it's a section filter)
               2. Highlight the category in the Filter setting.
               3. F4 (VALUES)
               4. Press SPACEBAR once and ENTER twice.

Clear a Filter, Condition, or Action

PURPOSE        When you no longer want to apply a filter, condition, or
               action, you need to clear it.

STEPS          In a view:
               1. One of the following:

                  TO CLEAR                DO THIS
                  ----------------------  -----------------------------------
                  View filter               F10 View Properties
                  Section filter          1. Highlight the section head.
                                          2. F10 View Section Properties
                  Condition or action     1. Highlight the category.
                                          2. F10 Category Properties

               2. Highlight category in Filter, Condition, or Action setting.

               3. Press DEL.

ALTERNATE      You can also clear conditions/actions in the category manager
               by highlighting the category and pressing ALT-F8 (CLR C/A).

Remove a Section

PURPOSE        When you no longer want a particular section to appear in a
               view, you can remove that section.

STEPS          In a view:

               1. Highlight the section.

               2. F10 View Section Remove

SHORTCUT       For Step 1, highlight the section head and press DEL.

RESULTS        Removes a section from the view.  This does not affect any
               category assignments for items in the section you remove.  It
               doesn't affect the category used as the section head.

SEE ALSO

Break an item's assignment,   » Index

Use Child Categories as Section Heads

PURPOSE        You can use the child categories (such as Bill and Sue) of any
               parent category (such as People) as section heads in a view.
               This lets you see items assigned to each child in a separate
               section.

NOTE           In the category hierarchy, child categories are indented below
               their parent category (see the example on the next screen).

STEPS          In a view:
               1. F10 View Add
               2. Type a name for the new view.
               3. Highlight Sections and press F3 (CHOICES).
               4. Highlight the parent of the categories you want to use as
                  section heads.
               5. Press F5 (CHLDRN) to pick the child categories and press
                  ENTER twice.

RESULTS        Agenda displays the new view with the child categories as the
               section heads.

EXAMPLE        For this category family:

                  Priority
                    High
                    Medium
                    Low

               Highlight Priority at Step 4 to use the child categories High,
               Medium, and Low as section heads in a view.

EXISTING       You can select child categories for section heads in existing
VIEWS          views.  Use the View Properties command then follow Steps 3
               through 5.

Columns

PURPOSE       Information in a view is displayed in sections that are made up
              of columns.  Columns have a column head (a category) and column
              entries, which depend on the column type.

              COLUMN TYPE    CONTENTS
              -------------  -------------------------------------------------
              Item column    Items
              Standard       Child categories of the category in the head
              Numeric        Numbers
              Date           Dates and/or times
              Unindexed      Text values

EXAMPLES      ITEM COLUMN               NUMERIC        STANDARD      DATE
              ------------------------  -------------  ------------  ---------
              Expense                   Cost           Project       When
               Ticket to London        ·$560.00       ·Interlink    ·10/17/90
               Call to Chicago office  ·$ 14.70       ·Scanner      ·10/19/90

SEE ALSO

Remove a column,   Display category notes,   Change properties,   Add a column,   Change width,   Move a column,   Change head,   » Index

Numeric Columns

PURPOSE        You can add numeric columns to display numbers and perform
               simple calculations.

STEPS          In a view:

               1. Highlight the column next to where you want the numeric
                  column.
               2. F10 View Column Add
               3. Enter a category for the column head.
               4. If the category isn't numeric, set Category Type to Numeric.
               5. Select calculations in the Column Add box.

NOTES          » You can't change numeric categories to any other category
                 type.
               » You can change the calculations for the column in the
                 Column Properties box.
               » To change the decimal and thousands separators that Agenda
                 displays: F10 Utilities Customize.

Date Columns

PURPOSE        You can add date columns to display dates and times.

STEPS          In a view:

               1. Highlight the column next to where you want the date
                  column.
               2. F10 View Column Add
               3. Enter a category for the column head.
               4. If the category isn't a date category, set Category Type to
                  Date.
               5. Select the display format in the Column Add box.

NOTES          » You can't change date categories to any other category type.
               » A date column can contain dates and/or times.
               » You can change the format for the column in the
                 Column Properties box.
               » To select default date settings: F10 File Properties.

SEE ALSO

Browse through dates,   Enter dates & times,   Datebook views,   » Index

Item Columns

PURPOSE        Every section in a view contains one column of items.  The item
               column is headed by the section head (a category).  You can't
               remove the item column.

CHANGES        To change the properties of the item column:

               1. Highlight anywhere in the item column.
               2. F10 View Column Properties
               3. Change the settings in the Item Column Properties box.

EXAMPLE        In this example, Ideas is the item column:

               Ideas                        People      Date
                  Increase widget size     ·Fred       ·11/05/90
                   to 12 cm.
                  Eliminate the third      ·Hans       ·11/07/90
                   auxiliary sprocket.

Files

PURPOSE        An Agenda file generally contains a set of views, a category
               hierarchy, and a number of items.  Agenda comes with several
               files, such as PLANNER.  You can also create your own.

WHAT YOU       Within a file, you can use file commands to perform operations
CAN DO         that affect the entire file, such as save, back up, and
               abandon.  The File Properties command contains settings
               that apply throughout the file, such as how dates are
               displayed, whether to back up files automatically, and what
               to do with items designated as done.

SEE ALSO

Starter files,   When selecting,   Retrieve,   Size of,   Password & description,   Erase,   Create,   Copy,   Import/export,   On a network,   » Index

Items

PURPOSE        An item is a line or two of information that you want to keep
               track of in Agenda.  You can assign each item to any number of
               categories.

EXAMPLES        Call newspapers today to respond to stories about costs.

                Jean reports continued problems with new routing system.

                Meeting with whole staff every Thursday at 11:00.

NOTE           Each item can be no longer than 350 characters.  To add more
               text for an item, attach a note.

SEE ALSO

Change properties,   Mark,   Make done,   Discard,   Set alarm,   Copy,   Enter,   Move,   About the item column,   Sort,   Edit,   Make dependent,   » Index

Sections

PURPOSE        A section is a group of columns that consist of items and
               categories.  The section head (a category) displays above the
               item column.  The items in a section are assigned to the
               section head category.

EXAMPLE        This example shows two sections.  In the first one, Calls is
               the section head.  In the second, Letters is the section head.

               Calls                      People    Phone #      When
                Call John re: DW deal    ·John     ·555-1234    ·10/07/90
                Call Karla for quotes    ·Karla    ·555-2996    ·10/08/90

               Letters                    People    Address      When
                Send Wendy an offer      ·Wendy H  ·15 Allison  ·10/06/90
                Answer client request    ·Patty B  ·28 Gleason  ·10/07/90

SEE ALSO

Remove a section,   Browse by date,   Go to a section,   Move sections,   Change properties,   Use a filter,   Add a section,   Sort sections,   » Index

Views

PURPOSE        Views are groups of sections that show items and categories
               from different perspectives.  You enter and edit items and
               categories in a view.  A file can contain many views.  You
               select views and perform other operations on views from the
               view manager.

EXAMPLES        A view named Calls can show phone calls and phone
                 numbers.

                A view named Tomorrow can show items you have to do
                 tomorrow and when.

                A view named Projects can show items grouped into a
                 section for each specific project.

                A view named People can show the items grouped into a
                 section for each person you work with.

SEE ALSO

Symbols in a view,   Browse by date,   Change properties,   Types of views,   Use a filter,   Sort view names,   Add a view,   » Index

View Manager

PURPOSE        You can use the view manager to list and use the views in
               your file.

STEPS          In a view:
                F8 (VWMGR)

USES           Once you're in the view manager, here's what you can do:

               IF YOU WANT TO                        PRESS
               ------------------------------------  -------------------------
               Switch to the highlighted view        ENTER
               Leave the view manager                ESC
               Add a view                            INS
               Edit a view name                      F2 (EDIT)
               Delete the highlighted view           F4 (DELETE) or ALT-F4
               Display the View Properties box       F6 (PROPS)
               Type a special character              ALT-F1 (COMPOSE)
               Sort the view names alphabetically    ALT-F5 (SORT)
               Make a copy of the highlighted view   ALT-F9 (COPY)
               Reposition a view in the list         ALT-F10 (MOVE)

Categories

PURPOSE        Categories are names that you use to group related items of
               information.  You can assign items to multiple categories.

TYPE OF        Agenda provides 4 different types of categories:
CATEGORIES
               TYPE       SYMBOL  CONTENTS
               ---------  ------  --------------------------------------------
               Standard           Other categories
               Numeric    #       Numbers
               Date       *       Dates and/or times
               Unindexed  D       Text values

HOW THEY       Agenda categories are hierarchical:         Staff
WORK           each category is part of a family of          Accounting
               categories.  You can display and change       Personnel
               this hierarchy in the category manager.       Payroll
                                                               Jim
                                                               Kathy

SEE ALSO

When selecting,   Change properties,   Add a note,   Discard,   Enter,   Edit,   Set up automatic assignments,   » Index

Date Categories

PURPOSE        Date categories let you assign dates and times to items.  When
               you use a date category as a column head, you can enter only
               dates and times as values.  Each Agenda file automatically
               contains three date categories:

               SYMBOL/CATEGORY  CONTENTS
               ---------------  ----------------------------------------------
               * Entry          The date/time you enter the item
               * When           The date/time the item is to happen
               * Done           The date/time you designate the item as done

               You can also create your own date categories.  You can't
               convert a date category to any other category type.

USES           You can use date categories as:
                Column heads for dates/times
                Section heads
                Filters for screening items in or out of views or sections
                Criteria for conditions and actions

SEE ALSO

Enter dates & times,   Category properties,   » Index

Unindexed Categories

PURPOSE        Unindexed categories let you assign text values to an item. The
               text values can be letters or numbers (that you don't want to
               use in calculations). Like the values you assign to numeric and
               date categories, unindexed values aren't categories themselves
               and they lack the versatility of standard categories:
                They don't appear in the category hierarchy.
                They can't have children.
                You can't use them as column or section heads.
                You can't use them as filters, conditions, or actions.

NOTE           It's the values you assign to unindexed categories (i.e., the
               column entries) that have limitations.  The unindexed column
               head is a category you can use like any type of category.

EXAMPLE        You can use an unindexed category to head a column of page
               numbers, part names, or room numbers -- any type of text you
               want to associate with an item, but wouldn't want to use like
               a standard category (for example, you want to know that a
               meeting is to be held in room 118, but you wouldn't want to use
               118 as a column head or in a filter -- or in a calculation).

Notes

PURPOSE        A note lets you add additional information to an item or a
               category.  The note stays out of the way in a separate screen.
               A note can be internal (you type it in Agenda) or external (it
               resides in an external file).  A note can be as long as you
               need, but if it's more than 10,000 characters (about 7 screens)
               you can't use Agenda to edit it.

               You can print, import, and export notes independently of the
               item or category to which they're attached.  A note remains in
               the file until you clear it or discard the item or category
               to which it is attached.

EXAMPLES        Add a meeting agenda to an item reminding about the meeting.
                Add brief information (such as phone or account number or
                 your contact person) to a category.  You can display these
                 category notes in columns in a view.
                Add a personnel record to that person's category name (so
                 Sue's record is always attached to the category Sue).

SEE ALSO

Enter a note,   Note editor,   » Index

View Types

PURPOSE        Agenda has two view types:

               VIEW TYPE     CONTENTS
               ------------  -------------------------------------------------
               Standard      Display any items and any type of category.  This
                             is the more general type of view.

               Datebook      Display items assigned to date and time ranges
                             you select.  For example, show items assigned
                             to When for Monday-Friday or items assigned to a
                             date category you created (such as Due) for this
                             quarter, shown by week.

NOTES          » You can't change either type of view to the other.

               » You can create special show views with the Utilities Show
                 command.  These views display schedules, items with alarms,
                 and so on.  You can have only one show view at a time.

The Category Hierarchy

PURPOSE        Categories in Agenda are hierarchical: some categories are
               child categories (subcategories) of others.  A file can have
               multiple generations in its category hierarchy.  The hierarchy
               lets you group similar categories to organize information.
               You see the category hierarchy in the category manager and
               when you press F3 to select a category.  Child categories are
               displayed indented under their parent.

EXAMPLES       CATEGORY         ROLE IN THE HIERARCHY
               ---------------  ----------------------------------------------
               People           Parent of Staff
                 Staff          Child of People; Parent of Karla and Wendy
                   Karla        Child of Staff
                   Wendy        Child of Staff

               When you add new categories to the file, it is important to
               position them properly in the hierarchy (you want Karla to be
               a child of Staff, not of some other parent).  This happens
               automatically when you type a new category as a column entry
               because the column head is the parent of the column entries.

TERMS TO       To describe the category hierarchy, Agenda borrows some terms
KNOW           from family trees:

               TERM             DEFINITION
               ---------------  ----------------------------------------------
               Child            A subcategory (such as Payroll) of a category
                                (such as Staff).  It can have children too.

               Parent           Has at least one child.  It can also be a
                                child of another category.

               Partial          A family of categories (parent plus all its
               hierarchy        child categories, their children, etc.).

               Ancestor         A higher-level member of a category family.

               MAIN category    The ancestor of all categories in the file.

               Descendent       A lower-level member of a category family.

SAMPLE         CATEGORY         ROLE IN THE HIERARCHY
HIERARCHY      ---------------  ----------------------------------------------
               MAIN             MAIN category
               * Entry          Child of MAIN; * means this is a date category
               * When
               * Done
                 People         Parent of Staff and Agents
                   Staff        Child of People; Parent of Karla and Wendy
                     Karla      Child of Staff
                     Wendy
                   Agents       Child of People; Parent of Lynn and Charles
                     Lynn       Child of Agents
                     Charles

NOTES          » People is an ancestor of Wendy, Karla, Lynn, and Charles.

               » In the category hierarchy, special symbols display to the
                 left of date and numeric categories.  When present, symbols
                 for conditions or actions display to the right of categories.

Sorting

PURPOSE        Agenda lets you arrange various kinds of info by sorting.

KINDS OF       WHAT         HOW                  WHERE                 USE
SORTING        -----------  -------------------  --------------------  -------
               View names   Alphabetically       View manager          ALT-F5

               Categories   Alphabetically       Category manager      ALT-F5

               Sections     Alphabetically,      View Properties       Section
                            numerically,                               Sorting
                            category order                             setting

               Items in a   Alphabetically,      Section Properties    Item
               section      numerically, date    (just one section)    Sorting
                            or category order    or View Properties    setting
                                                 (all sections in
                                                 view)

SEE ALSO

Sort view names,   Sort items,   Sort sections,   Sort categories,   » Index

Filters

PURPOSE        A filter is a category that:
                You can attach to any section or view
                Lets you set criteria (in addition to category assignments)
                 to limit which items display in a view or section
                Doesn't affect assignments
                Can be any category type

HOW IT         When you attach a filter, you choose:
WORKS           The category(s) to use to screen items
                Whether to display items only if they ARE assigned to the
                 filter category or only if they AREN'T assigned to it

EXAMPLES       "I want to see only my high-priority meetings."  In a view or
               section for meetings, select the High priority category for the
               Filter.

               "I don't want to see any calls to Jim or Kathy."  In a view or
               section for calls, select the Jim and Kathy categories for the
               Filter setting and choose Not Assigned for Show Items.

SEE ALSO

Attach a date filter,   Attach a numeric filter,   » Index

Automatic Completion

PURPOSE        When you type a category or pick a name from a list (such
               as a choice box for settings or the list of views in the
               view manager), Agenda matches what you type against the
               contents of the list.

WHAT YOU       As the matches display, you can:
CAN DO
                Continue typing until Agenda displays the match you want
                Quit typing and press ENTER to accept a match you want
                Press F3 to display all the possible matches (and pick one
                 from there)
                Press F5 to override matching to create a new category
                Use these keys in category lists to cycle through the
                 possible matches:

                 PRESS         TO SEE
                 ------------  -----------------------------------------------
                 F7 or ALT-P   Previous match
                 F8 or ALT-N   Next match

Confirm Mode

PURPOSE        Confirm mode gives you some protection against unintended
               changes to your file.  When this mode is on, Agenda displays
               questions to verify that a command you issued is really what
               you intend.  Confirm mode is on by default when you first use
               Agenda.  When you become an experienced user, you may want to
               turn off Confirm mode and not display the questions.

TURN CONFIRM   In a view:
MODE OFF/ON
               1. F10 Utilities Customize

               2. Highlight Confirm Mode (at the end of the box) and press
                  SPACEBAR (to switch the Yes/No setting).

               3. Press ENTER.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   List of commands and keys,   Issue commands,   » Index

Category Manager

PURPOSE        The category manager is a separate screen where you can work
               with the category hierarchy.  You can add, delete, and edit
               categories, and display and change category properties (such
               as conditions, actions, synonyms, and exclusivity) for all
               categories in the file.  The commands and function keys are
               suited for working with categories.  You can do some of these
               tasks, such as adding or changing categories, in other places.
               But you can do some tasks only in the category manager:

               TASK                              COMMAND
               --------------------------------  -----------------------------
               Sort categories alphabetically    ALT-F5 (SORT)
               Print the category hierarchy      F10 Print
               Promote or demote a category      F7 (PRM), F8 (DEM)
               Copy conditions and actions       ALT-F9 (CPY C/A)

STEPS          In a view:
                F9 (CATMGR)
               To return to the view, press F9 again.

EXAMPLES       CATEGORY         ROLES AND SYMBOLS
               ---------------  ----------------------------------------------
               MAIN             MAIN category (ancestor of all categories)
               * Entry          * means that this is a date category
               * When
               * Done
                 People         Parent of Staff
                   Staff        Child of People; Parent of Karla and Wendy
                     Karla      Child of Staff
                     Wendy      Child of Staff
                 TBD C= -Costs  C= means that a condition is attached to the
                                category assigning items to it if they aren't
                                assigned to Costs
               # Costs          # means that this is a numeric category
               D Page Nums      D means that this is an unindexed category
                 Priority       The bars on High, Medium, and Low (children of
                  +High         Priority), mean that these categories are
                  +Medium       exclusive (no item can be assigned to more
                  +Low          than one of these categories)

SEE ALSO

Reposition categories,   About symbols,   » Index

Conditions

PURPOSE        You can have Agenda make automatic assignments based on
               conditions you set.  These assignments break automatically
               when the condition no longer applies.

TYPES OF       CONDITION TYPE   DESCRIPTION
CONDITIONS     ---------------  ----------------------------------------------
               Text             Assign items to this category if they contain
                                the category name or other specified text (use
                                the Category Properties command to do this).
               Assignment       Assign an item to this category as long as the
                                item is assigned to another category.
               Numeric          Assign an item to this category as long as it
                                has a numeric assignment within a set range.
               Date             Assign an item to this category as long as it
                                has a date assignment within a set range.

NOTE           When a category has a condition attached (except for text
               conditions), Agenda displays a symbol (C=) next to the
               category in the category manager.  Synonyms for text
               conditions are displayed to the right of the category name.

EXAMPLES:       When you assign items to the Meetings category, you can have
ASSIGNMENT       Agenda automatically assign these items to a High priority
CONDITIONS       category.

                When you don't assign items to High priority, you can have
                 Agenda automatically assign these items to a category called
                 Later.

EXAMPLE:        When an item you enter contains the name of a category in
TEXT             your file, Agenda automatically assigns the item to that
CONDITIONS       category.  The presence of the category name means that the
                 items matches the text condition (that the category name or
                 its synonym is contained in the item).

                 For example, PLANNER contains the category Calls, which has
                 synonyms Phone, Telephone, and Call.  If an item contains
                 any of these words, the text condition is met.

SEE ALSO

Manual assignments,   » Index

Actions

PURPOSE        You can attach an action to a category to tell Agenda to
               perform an explicit act when an item is assigned to that
               category.

TYPES OF       ACTION TYPE   DESCRIPTION
ACTIONS        ------------  -------------------------------------------------
               Assignment    Trigger additional assignments for items.  These
                             assignments are explicit.
               Numeric       Assign a number to an item when the item is
                             assigned to the category with an attached action.
               Date          Assign a date to an item when the item is
                             assigned to the category with an attached action.
               Special       Do one of 3 things to an item when the item is
                             assigned to another category: discard it, export
                             it, or designate it as done.  (To attach special
                             actions, use the Category Properties command.)

NOTE           When a category has an action attached, Agenda displays a
               symbol (A=) next to the category in the category manager.

SEE ALSO

Manual assignments,   Automatic assignments,   » Index

Automatic Assignments

PURPOSE        Agenda lets you attach conditions and actions to categories to
               make assignments automatically.

CONDITIONS     Attach a condition to category X to draw assignments to
VS. ACTIONS    category X itself.  Attach an action to category X to trigger
               assignments to other categories.

                A condition makes a conditional assignment to the category
                 to which the condition is attached.  If the assignment that
                 triggered the conditional assignment is broken, the
                 conditional assignment breaks too.
                An action makes an explicit assignment to a different
                 category.  The fate of this explicit automatic assignment
                 to another category has no effect on the category to which
                 the action is attached.

NOTE           You attach conditions and actions to specific categories.
               When a category has an attached condition or action, the
               category manager displays symbols for conditions and actions.

EXAMPLE        1. You attach a CONDITION to High Priority to assign items to
                  High Priority if they are assigned to Project X.
               2. You attach an ACTION to Project X to assign items to Rebecca
                  when they are assigned to Project X.  In the category
                  manager, the condition and action look like:
                      High Priority {C=Project X}
                      Project X  {A=Rebecca}
               3. You enter the item "Reschedule all projects".
               4. You assign this item to Project X.
                  Agenda conditionally assigns this item to High Priority
                  (because of the condition attached to High Priority) and
                  explicitly assigns it to Rebecca (because of the action
                  attached to Project X).
               5. You reschedule Project X and break the item's assignment to
                  Project X.  Breaking this assignment automatically:
                   Breaks the item's assignment to High Priority because this
                    assignment is conditional
                   Does NOT break the item's assignment to Rebecca because
                    this assignment is explicit

SEE ALSO

Manual assignments,   » Index

Explicit and Conditional Assignments

HOW THEY       The differences between conditional and explicit assignments
DIFFER         lie in how they are made and in the strength of the assignment
               in the face of change.

                Conditional assignments are temporary.  They occur only when
                 Agenda applies a condition you attach to a category.  Once
                 made, a conditional assignment lasts only as long as the
                 assignment or text match that triggered it.

                Explicit assignments are permanent.  They occur when you make
                 assignments manually (by typing, copying, moving) or when
                 Agenda applies an action you attach to a category.  Once
                 made, explicit assignments must be actively broken.  Even
                 when they are made as the result of another assignment, their
                 staying power never depends on another assignment.

NOTE           In an assignment profile for an item, conditional assignments
               are marked with a star and the letter c (*c).  Explicit
               assignments show just the star (*).

SEE ALSO

Manual assignments,   Automatic assignments,   » Index

Use the Pop-Up Calendar

PURPOSE        You can use the pop-up calendar to assign dates/times to items
               or just to look up dates in any month from January 1, 1 A.D.
               to December 31, 5000.

STEPS          In a date column in a view:
               1. Highlight a column entry position and press F3 (CHOICES).
               2. Pick a date and/or time:

                  PICK A TIME                  PICK A DATE
                  ---------------------------  -------------------------------
                  1. Press F6 (SETTIME).        Highlight the date and press
                  2. Type a time and press       ENTER.
                     ENTER twice.

NOTES          » Press PGDN to learn about scrolling through the calendar.

               » You can display the pop-up calendar without first moving the
                 highlight into a date column by pressing ALT-C.  The calendar
                 displays the current month with the current day highlighted.

SCROLLING      Use these keys to scroll through the calendar:
KEYS
               PRESS         TO HIGHLIGHT
               ------------  -------------------------------------------------
                            Previous day
                            Next day

                            Previous week
                            Next week

               HOME          First day of the current month
               END           Last day of the current month

               PGUP          Current day in the previous month
               PGDN          Current day in the next month

               CTRL-        Current day and month in the previous year
               CTRL-        Current day and month in the next year

SEE ALSO

Enter dates & times,   » Index

Numeric Categories

PURPOSE        Numeric categories let you assign numbers to items and perform
               simple calculations using these numeric values.  When you use a
               numeric category as a column head, you can enter only numbers
               as column entries.

USES           You can use numeric categories as:
                Column heads for numbers
                Section heads
                Filters for screening items in or out of views or sections
                Categories for conditions and actions

NOTES          » Use the Type setting in a Category Add or Category Properties
                 box to make a category numeric.
               » You can't convert a numeric category to any other category
                 type.
               » In the category hierarchy, numeric categories are preceded by
                 the number symbol (#).

Select a File

PURPOSE        The Select File box lets you retrieve a file, create a new one,
               and perform other tasks with files.  This box displays a list
               of the files and directories on the current disk.

WHAT YOU       Subdirectories display with the suffix <DIR>.  Files are shown
SEE            without file name extensions.  Some file names may display
               one of these symbols:

               SYMBOL  MEANING
               ------  -------------------------------------------------------
               +       There is more than one file with this name (and a
                       different extension).  These other files could be
                       backups or an earlier saved version of a damaged file.

               @       The file is damaged; don't retrieve it.

WHAT YOU       You can delete (F4) a file, show the creation date (F7) and, if
CAN DO         you entered one, the description of a file (F8).  You can also
               perform the following tasks:

USE THE        IF YOU WANT TO                   DO THIS
FILE LIST      -------------------------------  ------------------------------
               Pick an existing file            Highlight the file name and
                                                press ENTER

               Create a new file                Press INS and follow prompts

               Switch directories               Highlight the directory name
                                                and press ENTER

               Rename a file                    Press F9 (RENAME) and type the
                                                new name

               Display all files with the       Highlight the file name and
               same name (show extensions)      press F6 (EXPAND)

               Retrieve a file from another     Type the drive letter, path,
               drive                            and file name (for example,
                                                c:\info\sample)

ABOUT FILE     By default, Agenda uses these file name extensions:
EXTENSIONS
               FILE EXTENSION  FILE CONTENTS
               --------------  -----------------------------------------------
               .AG             Agenda application file (such as PLANNER or a
                               file you created)
               .BG             Agenda application backup file
               .NPS            Named print set for printing with reusable
                               layout, preview, and final settings
               .STF            Structured file for importing and exporting
                               information to and from Agenda
               .DEF            A definition file to use during import/export
               .MAC            An external macro file
               .AGA            An Agenda 1.0 file (contents portion)
               .AGB            An Agenda 1.0 file (structure portion)
               .BKA            An Agenda 1.0 backup file (contents portion)
               .BKB            An Agenda 1.0 backup file (structure portion)

SEE ALSO

About Agenda files,   » Index

Create a Datebook View

PURPOSE        Create a datebook view to display items assigned to date and
               time ranges you select.  For example, show items assigned to
               When for Monday-Friday or items assigned to a date category you
               created (such as Due) for this quarter, shown by the week.

STEPS          In a view:

               1. F10 View Add
               2. Name the view.
               3. Pick Datebook in the View Type setting.
               4. Fill in the datebook settings.

RESULTS        The datebook view displays items in sections headed by the time
               periods you pick in the Interval setting (if you pick Week for
               Period, Interval is automatically set to Daily).

SEE ALSO

Browse through dates,   » Index

Create a Show View

PURPOSE        You can create special views with the Utilities Show command.
               There are 8 types of show views; each shows items from the
               file that meet special criteria. These views aren't as flexible
               as standard and datebook views: you can display them, but not
               add to them.  A file can have only one show view at a time.

STEPS          In a view:
               1. F10 Utilities Show
               2. Pick the type of show view and press ENTER.
               3. Follow the screen prompts.

RESULTS        Agenda displays the items from the file that meet the special
               criteria (such as all items that have an alarm set).  The view
               is listed in the view manager as *Show View* (a show view does
               not have its own name).

NOTE           To create another show view, you must delete the existing one.
               Agenda asks you to do this when you create a second show view.

SEE ALSO

Show a schedule for any day,   » Index

Show a Schedule for Any Day

PURPOSE        Create a show view to display items assigned to any one date.
               Since a file can contain only one show view at a time, this is
               generally a temporary view, not a substitute for a datebook
               view.

STEPS          In a view:
               1. F10 Utilities Show Sched
               2. Fill in the Show Schedule box and press ENTER.

RESULTS        Agenda displays the items from the file that are scheduled for
               the date you picked (and meet any other special criteria).

NOTE           You can limit the items displayed by:
                The section head you pick (press F3 on the Section Head
                 setting in the Show Schedule box to pick a category other
                 than MAIN, which includes all items in the file)
                Setting a time as well as a date (press F3 on the Date
                 setting and then F6 to set time)
                Setting filters to screen out items you don't want to see

SEE ALSO

Enter dates & times,   » Index

Designate an Item as Done

PURPOSE        When you complete the task that an item refers to, you can
               designate that item as done.  Agenda then assigns the current
               date and time as the Done date for the item.

STEP           In a view:

                Highlight the item and press F4 (DONE).

RESULT         Agenda displays the done symbol (!!) next to the item.

NOTE           You can cancel the done designation by pressing F4 (DONE) on a
               done item.  This breaks the assignment to the Done date.

OTHER          The chart on the next screen shows how to set up special
FEATURES       treatment for done items.

MANIPULATE     GOAL           COMMAND          SETTING               CHOICE
DONE ITEMS     -------------  ---------------  --------------------  ---------
               Discard from   File Properties  Global Date Settings  Discard
               the file                        (Process Done Items)

               Export to      File Properties  Global Date Settings  Export to
               a file                          (Process Done Items)  Done File

               Remove from    View Properties  Hide Done Items       Yes
               the view

               Display in     Utilities Show
               a show view    ItemsDone

NOTE           Hiding done items does not break any assignments for the items;
               it simply filters them out of the view.  If you choose to hide
               done items, the easiest way to get a quick look at them is to
               create a show view for done items.

Assignment Profile for an Item

PURPOSE        You can display assignment information for an item or a group
               of marked items.  You can also make and break assignments.

STEPS          In a view:
               1. Highlight the item or mark a group of items with F7 (MARK).
               2. F3 (CHOICES)

RESULTS        The assignment profile appears, including these symbols:

               FOR A SINGLE ITEM               FOR A GROUP OF MARKED ITEMS
               ------------------------------  -------------------------------
               *   The item is explicitly      (number) The number of items in
                   assigned to this category            the group assigned to
                                                        this category
               *c  The item is conditionally
                   assigned to this category

               ?   This assignment isn't in
                   use; you must confirm it

MAKE/BREAK     Using an assignment profile for making and breaking assignments
ASSIGNMENTS    is especially convenient for groups of marked items.

STEPS          In a view:
               1. F3 (CHOICES)
               2. Highlight the category to which you want to make/break an
                  assignment.
               3. Press SPACEBAR.

RESULTS        The symbol in the left column reflects the assignment (if you
               break the assignment, the symbol is removed).  Assignments
               you make in an assignment profile are explicit.

NOTE           You can also see, make, or break an item's assignments in the
               Item Properties box (highlight the item and press F6 or use F10
               Item Properties).  Assignment profiles offer two additional
               functions: you can work with a group of marked items as well as
               a single item, and (for single items) you can see whether
               assignments are conditional or explicit.  You also see the
               assignments in the context of the category hierarchy.

SEE ALSO

Manipulate categories in the profile,   » Index

Set an Alarm for an Item

PURPOSE        You can set an alarm on items to ring when you want.  You can
               base the alarm on any date category.

STEPS          In a view:
               1. Highlight the item.
               2. F10 Item Alarm
               3. Fill in the Set Alarm box.

SHORTCUT       At Step 2, press ALT-A.

RESULTS        Agenda displays a symbol (@) in front of items with alarms.
               The alarm sounds when the computer system date/time equals the
               date/time in the date category for the alarm (minus the number
               of minutes you picked in the Minutes Before setting in the Set
               Alarm box).  The @ symbol is removed after the alarm sounds,
               but the item itself is not affected.

NOTE           You can create a special show view to display all items with
               pending alarms and with alarms that have already sounded.

Enter Dates and Times

PURPOSE        You can enter dates/times in any date column and for certain
               command settings.

STEPS          In a date column in a view:
               1. Highlight a column entry position.
               2. Either:
                   Type the date/time.
                   Or, press F3 (CHOICES) to pick from the pop-up calendar.

POP-UP         PICK A TIME                            PICK A DATE
CALENDAR       -------------------------------------  ------------------------
               1. F6 (SETTIME)                         Highlight the date
               2. Type a time and press ENTER twice.    and press ENTER.

RESULTS        In a column, Agenda displays the date/time in the format you
               selected when you created the column.  You can assign a time
               for an item even when the column shows only dates.

NOTE           If the item contains a date/time, it is automatically assigned
               to the When category.

DATE COLUMN    TO CHANGE                    USE
FORMATS        ---------------------------  ----------------------------------
               Existing single date column  F10 View Column Properties

               Defaults for all date        F10 File Properties
               columns                      (Global Date settings)

AUTOMATIC      Agenda makes some date assignments automatically:
DATE
ASSIGNMENTS    WHEN YOU              AGENDA ASSIGNS           TO THIS CATEGORY
               --------------------  -----------------------  ----------------
               Enter an item         The current date/time    Entry date

               Include a date/time   The date/time you typed  When date
               in the item text

               Designate an item     The current date/time    Done date
               as done

Search for Text in Items and Notes

PURPOSE        You can search through the file to find every occurrence of any
               text in items and/or notes.  The text can be a word, a phrase,
               a few letters, a number you typed in the text, and so on.

STEPS          In a view or note:

               1. ALT-F6 (SEARCH)
               2. Fill in the Search box.

RESULTS        Agenda finds the first occurrence of the text and asks how you
               want to proceed. To review the item before you continue the
               search, press ENTER.  To resume the search, press ALT-F6 again.
               Agenda remembers the text you were searching for.

NOTES          » You can create a special show view (called Match) to
                 display all items that contain the same text.

               » You can search and replace text in notes, but not in items.

Change Screen Colors

PURPOSE        If you have a color monitor, you can override the default color
               set and pick colors for various parts of the screen display.

STEPS          In a view:
               1. F10 Utilities Customize
               2. Highlight Color and press F3 (CHOICES).
               3. Pick Custom and press ENTER.
               4. Highlight Set Custom Colors and press SPACEBAR.
               5. Fill in the Custom Colors box.

NOTES          » A sample of the colors you pick displays at the bottom of the
                 box (see Sample text).
               » You may not want to pick colors for all the screen parts in
                 the Custom Colors box.  Just pick the parts you recognize.

CAUTION        Be sure the color you pick for Background in each screen area
               isn't the same color you pick for any other part of that screen
               area.  For example, if you pick Blue for View Background and
               for Item, you won't be able to see the items.

Attach an External File as a Note

PURPOSE        You can attach an ASCII file as a note for an item or category.
               For example, you can attach a file you created with a word
               processor.  You can use any note commands to work with
               attached files (but see Notes below).  For example, you can
               make text from the file into items or categories.  You can also
               print note files.

STEPS          In a note:
               1. F10 File Attach
               2. Either:
                   Type the file name (including a path, if necessary).
                   Or, press F3 (CHOICES) to pick a file.

NOTES          » If you use F3, you can pick other directories (such as
                 Parent) from those displayed above the list of files.
               » If the file you attach is longer than 10K, Agenda informs
                 you that you can only read the file (not edit it).

RESULTS        Agenda displays a musical double-note symbol (jj) in front of
               items with attached files.

Change a Column Head

PURPOSE        You can pick a different category for the column head or edit
               the name of the existing column head.

WHAT YOU       GOAL                            STEPS (IN A VIEW)
CAN DO         ------------------------------  -------------------------------
               Pick a different category       1. Highlight the column head.
               for the column head             2. F3 (CHOICES)
                                               3. Highlight the category you
                                                  want and press ENTER.

               Edit the name of the column     1. Highlight the column head.
               head category (changes the      2. F2 (EDIT)
               name of this category           3. Change the category name.
               throughout the file)

NOTE           You can also edit the category name in the category manager and
               in any Select Category box.

Alphabetize View Names

PURPOSE        You can sort view names in the view manager in alphabetical
               order to make views easier to find.

STEPS          In a view:

               1. F8 (VWMGR)

               2. ALT-F5 (SORT)

RESULT         Views display in alphabetical order in the view manager.

NOTE           You can't undo this sort, but you can use ALT-F10 (MOVE) to
               rearrange individual view names.

SEE ALSO

About sorting,   » Index

Attach an Assignment Condition to a Category

PURPOSE        You can attach an assignment condition to a category to make
               automatic conditional assignments to that category.  Conditions
               pull assignments to the category to which they are attached.

STEPS          In a view or the category manager:
               1. Highlight the category to which you're attaching a condition
                  and press F10 Category Properties.
               2. Highlight Assignment Conditions and press F3 (CHOICES).
               3. Highlight the category to test and press SPACEBAR:
                   Once to assign items automatically to the category with
                    the condition if they're assigned to the test category
                   Twice to assign items automatically to the category with
                    the condition if they're NOT assigned to the test category
               4. Press ENTER.

RESULTS        Conditional assignments hold only as long as the condition
               holds.  For example: a condition attached to Fran assigns items
               to Fran if the items are assigned to Project X.  If the assign-
               ment to Project X is broken, so is the assignment to Fran.

NOTES          » You can attach more than one condition to a category by
                 repeating Step 3.  You can attach different types of
                 conditions and any type of action to a category.

               » You can also set date or numeric conditions.

               » In Step 3 you choose the condition value.  The symbol for
                 this value displays in the left column in the Condition box.
                 You can change this value at any time.

                 VALUE        SYMBOL  MEANING
                 -----------  ------  ----------------------------------------
                 Assigned     +       Items are assigned to the category if
                                      they're assigned to the test category.

                 Not          -       Items are assigned to the category if
                 assigned             NOT assigned to the test category.

               » To execute conditions on existing items, press ALT-X.

SEE ALSO

Manual assignments,   Clear a condition,   » Index

Attach an Assignment Action to a Category

PURPOSE        You can attach an assignment action to a category to make
               automatic explicit assignments to another category.  Actions
               trigger assignments to other categories.

STEPS          In a view or the category manager:
               1. Highlight the category to which you're attaching an action
                  and press F10 Category Properties.
               2. Highlight Assignment Actions and press F3 (CHOICES).
               3. Highlight the target category and press SPACEBAR:
                   Once to assign items automatically to the target category
                    when they are assigned to the category with the action
                   Twice to unassign items from the target category when they
                    are assigned to the category with the action
               4. Press ENTER.

RESULTS        Explicit assignments are not dependent on another assignment,
               and they hold unless you explicitly break the assignment.  For
               example: an action attached to Project X assigns items to Fran
               when items are assigned to Project X.  If the assignment to
               Project X is broken, the assignment to Fran is not affected.

NOTES          » You can attach more than one action to a category by
                 repeating Step 3.  You can attach different types of actions
                 and any type of condition to a category.

               » You can also set date or numeric actions.

               » In Step 3 you choose the action value.  The symbol for this
                 value displays in the left column in the Action box.  You can
                 change this value at any time.

                 VALUE        SYMBOL  MEANING
                 -----------  ------  ----------------------------------------
                 Assigned     +       Items are assigned to target category if
                                      they're assigned to category w/action.
                 Not          -       Assignment to the target category breaks
                 assigned             when item is assigned to the category
                                      with the action.

               » To execute actions on existing items, press ALT-X.

SEE ALSO

Manual assignments,   Clear an action,   » Index

Change the Value of a Condition or Action

PURPOSE        You use an assignment condition to draw conditional assignments
               to a category automatically.  You use an assignment action to
               make explicit assignments to other categories automatically.
               For both conditions and actions, you choose a value for the
               automatic assignment when you attach the condition or action:

ABOUT          VALUE        SYMBOL  MEANING
VALUES         -----------  ------  ------------------------------------------
               Assigned     +       Make an assignment when an item is
                                    assigned to another category

               Not          -        Condition: make an assignment when an
               assigned               item ISN'T assigned to another category

                                     Action: break an assignment when an
                                      item is assigned to another category

CHANGE THE     In a view or the category manager:
VALUE
               1. Highlight the category whose condition or action value you
                  want to change and press F10 Category Properties.

               2. Highlight Assignment Condition or Assignment Action.

               3. Highlight the category whose value you want to change and
                  press F4 (VALUES).

               4. Press SPACEBAR once and ENTER twice.

SEE ALSO

Attach an action,   Attach a condition,   » Index

Attach a Date Condition

PURPOSE        You can attach a date condition to a category to automatically
               assign items with certain dates/times to that category.  Date
               conditions are the same as standard conditions, with another
               feature: ranges.

RANGES         Besides choosing whether assignments are drawn to a category
               if they are or are not assigned to the date category, you can:

                Set a RANGE of dates for the date condition (such as all
                 dates between 8/26/91 and 8/28/91)
                Choose whether to include items that are inside or outside
                 the range

EXAMPLE        You can attach a date condition to category Reroute so that if
               you assign a When date inside the range 6/14/91 to 6/21/91 to
               an item, Agenda automatically assigns the item to Reroute.

STEPS          In a view or the category manager:

               1. Highlight the category to which you want to pull assignments
                  if an item meets the date condition.
               2. F10 Category Properties
               3. Highlight Assignment Conditions and press F3 (CHOICES).
               4. Highlight the date category for the condition and press
                  SPACEBAR.
               5. Choose whether items will display if they are or are not
                  assigned to the date category condition.
               6. If you choose Assigned, you can also choose:
                   A range for the date condition (enter dates for Start Date
                    and End Date)
                   Whether dates assigned to the condition category for each
                    item should be inside or outside the range you set

NOTE           To choose just one date/time (instead of a range), enter the
               same date/time in Start Date and End Date.

SEE ALSO

Manual assignments,   Automatic assignments,   » Index

Attach a Numeric Condition

PURPOSE        You can attach a numeric condition to a category to assign
               items with certain numbers to that category automatically.
               Numeric conditions are the same as standard conditions, with
               another feature: ranges.

RANGES         Besides choosing whether assignments are drawn to a category if
               they are or are not assigned to the numeric category, you can:

                Set a RANGE of numbers for the numeric condition (such as all
                 numbers between 100 and 199)
                Choose whether to include items that are inside or outside
                 the range

EXAMPLE        You can attach a numeric condition to category Petty Cash so
               that when you assign a number inside the range .01 to 50 to
               an item, Agenda automatically assigns the item to Petty Cash.

STEPS          In a view or the category manager:

               1. Highlight the category to which you want to trigger
                  assignments if an item meets the numeric condition.
               2. F10 Category Properties
               3. Highlight Assignment Conditions and press F3 (CHOICES).
               4. Highlight the numeric category for the condition and press
                  SPACEBAR.
               5. Choose whether items will display if they are or are not
                  assigned to the numeric category condition.
               6. If you choose Assigned, you can also choose:
                   A range for the numeric condition (enter numbers for
                    Minimum and Maximum)
                   Whether numbers assigned to the condition category for
                    each item should be inside or outside the range you set

NOTE           To choose just one number (instead of a range), enter the same
               number in Minimum and Maximum.

SEE ALSO

Manual assignments,   Automatic assignments,   » Index

Browse Through Dates

PURPOSE        You can use the Browse command to shift the dates in a view or
               section and thereby change which items display.  Browse lets
               you move quickly forward or back by day, week, month, or year.
               You can browse in a datebook view, or in a standard view or
               section with a date filter.

STEPS          In a standard view or highlighted section with a date filter,
               or in a datebook view:
               1. F10 View Browse
               2. Use the browse keys (shown on next page) to shift the date.
               3. Quit browsing by pressing either:
                   ENTER to replace the original dates with the current
                    browse dates
                   ESC to cancel the browse dates and restore the originals

SHORTCUT       Press ALT-B in Step 1.

NOTE           If you have more than one date filter in the view or section,
               Agenda tries to use all of these filters simultaneously.

IN STANDARD    TO MOVE                  PRESS
VIEWS          -----------------------  --------------------------------------
               Forward one day          
               Back one day             
               Forward one week         CTRL-
               Back one week            CTRL-
               Forward one month        PGDN
               Back one month           PGUP
               Forward one year         CTRL-PGDN
               Back one year            CTRL-PGUP

IN DATEBOOK    Forward one period       
VIEWS          Back one period          

EXAMPLES        In the PLANNER application, the This Week view shows your
                 obligations for the current week.  You can use Browse in this
                 datebook view to see what's scheduled for two weeks from now.
                If you have a date filter on a Meetings section so that only
                 meetings scheduled for the next three days display, you can
                 use Browse to shift the 3-day filter ahead (or back).

SEE ALSO

Attach a date filter,   » Index

Alphabetize Categories

PURPOSE        You can sort category names in the category manager in
               alphabetical order.  You can sort all the categories or just
               a family of categories.  When you use alphabetized children as
               section heads in a view, the sections will be alphabetized and
               easier to find.

STEPS          In the category manager:

               1. Highlight the parent of the family you want to alphabetize.
               2. ALT-F5 (SORT)

RESULTS        Categories in the sorted family display in alphabetical order
               in the category manager.

NOTES          » To alphabetize all the categories in the file, highlight MAIN
                 in Step 1.

               » You can't undo this sort, but you can use ALT-F10 (MOVE) to
                 rearrange individual category names.

SEE ALSO

About sorting,   » Index

Unassigned Item Discard Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Item has no        You have just used the Item Properties box to break all of
remaining          the assignments for the current item (by removing every
assignments.       category from the Assigned To setting).

Discard the        Yes.......Discard this item from the Agenda file.  (An item
item?                        can't remain in the file unless it's assigned to
                             at least one category.)

                             Tip:  You can recover discarded items during the
                             same Agenda session by using the Item Undisc
                             command.

                   No........Return to the Item Properties box so you can
                             assign this item to one or more categories (by
                             filling in the Assigned To setting).

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Assign an item,   » Index

Remove Unprotected Column Confirmation Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Columns in         You have asked to remove the current column from all
protected          sections in the view.  But some of the view's sections are
sections will      protected, and columns can't be removed from protected
not be removed.    sections.

Continue?          Yes.......Remove the column from all unprotected sections
                             of the view, even though it won't be removed from
                             the protected sections. (The unprotected sections
                             are those you appended to the view since it was
                             protected.)  Note: If the column in a section is
                             unlinked, it won't be removed either.

                   No........Cancel the remove request and keep the column in
                             every section where it currently appears.
                             Tip:  To remove the column from all sections,
                             you must first unprotect the view by using the
                             View Properties command.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Change Unprotected Column Confirmation Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Columns in         You have asked to change the current column in all sections
protected          of the view. But some of the view's sections are protected,
sections will      and columns can't be changed in protected sections.
not be changed.

Continue?          Yes.......Change the column in all unprotected sections of
                             the view, even though it won't be changed in the
                             protected sections.  (The unprotected sections
                             are those you appended to the view since it was
                             protected.)  Note: If the column in a section is
                             unlinked, it won't be changed either.

                   No........Cancel the change request and keep the column as
                             is in every section.  Tip: To change the column
                             in all sections, you must first unprotect the
                             view by using the View Properties command.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Reservation Not Available Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Can't get the      You have asked to retrieve a file for which Agenda
reservation.       automatically tries to get the reservation.  But you
                   are currently unable to get the reservation for this
                   file (probably because another user has it).

                   Note:  You may also get this message if you've changed
                   the file's attribute in DOS to be read-only.

Continue?          Yes.......Retrieve the file even though you don't have the
                             reservation.  This means you have the file in
                             Read-Only mode, so you can't update it.

                             Tip:  If you want to try to get a reservation for
                             this file later in the session, use the File
                             Maintenance Reservation command.

                   No........Cancel the request to retrieve this file.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Remove Section Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Remove this        Yes.......Remove the current section from the view.  (The
section from                 category used as the section head remains in the
the view?                    category hierarchy after you remove the section.
                             Also, items and their assignments in the Agenda
                             file are not affected when you remove the
                             section.)

                   No........Cancel the remove request and keep the current
                             section as is in the view.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Turn off confirm mode,   » Index

Remove Filter Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Remove the entire  Yes.......Clear this filter (by clearing the entire list of
assignment                   categories currently specified for it).  Clearing
filter?                      has no effect on those categories themselves.

                   No........Cancel the request to clear this filter and keep
                             it as is.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Turn off confirm mode,   » Index

Remove Assignment Condition Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Remove the entire  Yes.......Clear all conditions from the current category
assignment                   (by clearing the entire list of condition
condition?                   categories specified for it).  Clearing the list
                             of condition categories has no effect on those
                             categories themselves.

                   No........Cancel the request to clear the current
                             category's conditions and keep them as they
                             are.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Turn off confirm mode,   » Index

Remove Assignment Action Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Remove the entire  Yes.......Clear all actions from the current category (by
assignment                   clearing the entire list of action categories
action?                      specified for it).  Clearing the list of action
                             categories has no effect on those categories
                             themselves.

                   No........Cancel the request to clear the current
                             category's actions and keep them as they
                             are.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Turn off confirm mode,   » Index

Replace Print Output File Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
File already       Yes.......Completely replace the current contents of the
exists, do you               print output file (which already exists on disk)
want to replace              with your new output.  The name of this file is
it?                          specified in the File setting of the Final Print
                             box.

                             Caution:  You can't recover the file's current
                             contents once you replace them.

                   No........Cancel the print request and leave this file
                             unchanged.  Agenda returns you to the Final Print
                             box where you can either select a different
                             existing file to use or type the name of a new
                             file.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Attribute Choices Box

PURPOSE       You can select an attribute or a combination of attributes that
              Agenda uses when printing the specified text.

STEPS         1. Use , , HOME, and END to        +-------- Choices --------+
                 highlight an attribute you        |  Normal                 |
                 want to select or remove.         |x Bold                   |
                                                   |x Italic                 |
              2. Press SPACEBAR (an X appears      |  Underscore words       |
                 beside each selected attribute).  |  Underscore all         |
                                                   |x Double underscore words|
              3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until        |  Double underscore all  |
                 you've selected the combination   |  Subscript              |
                 of attributes you want.           |  Superscript            |
                                                   |  Strikethrough          |
              4. Press ENTER.                      |  Small caps             |
                                                   +-------------------------+
NOTES         » Agenda won't let you pick conflicting combinations.
              » See your printer manual to find out which attributes your
                printer supports.

SEE ALSO

About printing,   Attribute marker settings,   » Index

Remove Marked/Current Item(s) Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Remove             Which item(s) to remove from particular sections:

                   Current item....Remove only the currently highlighted item.

                   Marked items....Remove every item in the file that you've
                                   marked (t) with F7 (MARK).

                   When you remove an item from a section, you are breaking
                   the assignment between the item and the category that's
                   used as the section head.  This doesn't cause the item to
                   be discarded from the Agenda file (unless the item isn't
                   assigned to any other categories).

                   Tip:  If you want to completely discard the item from the
                   file, use the Item Discard command or ALT-F4 (DISCARD).

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Assign an item,   » Index

Remove Selection Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Remove             What to remove:

                   Marked items....Remove every marked (t) item in the file
                                   from its section.  This breaks the
                                   assignment between the item and the
                                   category used as the section head. It does
                                   not discard the item from the file (unless
                                   item isn't assigned to other categories).

                                   Tip:  To discard items from the file, use
                                   Item Discard command or ALT-F4 (DISCARD).
                   Current
                   selection.......Remove the highlighted section from the
                                   view.  (The category used as the section
                                   head remains in the category hierarchy
                                   after you remove the section.  Items and
                                   assignments in the file are not affected.)

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Replace File Using 1.0 Version Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Updating           You have asked to retrieve an Agenda 1.0 file (with file
Release 1 file     extension .AGA).  This file will automatically be converted
(filename)         to the Agenda 2.0 format (and be given the extension .AG).
                   But the current directory already contains an Agenda 2.0
                   file with this name, so you must specify whether to replace
                   the existing 2.0 file with the converted contents.

Replace existing   Yes.......Completely replace the existing 2.0 file with
(filename)                   the converted contents from the 1.0 file.
                   No........Keep the existing 2.0 file as is and save the
                             converted contents from the 1.0 file to a new
                             file name (see the setting below).

New file name      1 to 8 character name of file in which to store converted
                   contents.  Specify a path if you want to save file in a
                   directory other than current one.  Don't specify a file
                   extension (Agenda automatically adds .AG).

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Select a file,   » Index

Reposition Names in a List

PURPOSE       When a setting (in a dialog box) displays a list of names, you
              may want to rearrange the order of those names.

STEPS         1. Use , , HOME, and END to highlight a name you want to
                 reposition in the list.

              2. ALT-F10 (MOVE)

              3. Use  and  to move the name to its new position in the list.

              4. Press ENTER.

EXAMPLES      You can use this technique to reposition names in:

               The Sections setting of the View Properties box
               The Columns setting of the Section Properties box

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Change When Date Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Change item's      Yes.......Re-evaluate the relative date contained in this
date from                    item's text based on the current date and time.
(old When date) to           The result of this re-evaluation is a new When
(new When date)              date for the item.

                             Example:  Suppose you edit an item that includes
                             the relative date "tomorrow".  If today's date is
                             11/05/90, Agenda replaces the item's old When
                             date with the new value 11/06/90.

                   No........Keep the item's existing When date as is.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Enter dates & times,   » Index

Delete Category Note Entry Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Remove the entry   Yes.......Remove the highlighted entry from the category
from the category            note column of the view and also delete it from
note?                        the appropriate category note.  (This doesn't
                             delete the entire category note, only the line
                             that appears in the category note column.)

                             Caution:  You can't recover this entry once you
                             remove it.

                   No........Cancel the remove request and keep this entry
                             in the view and in the category note.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   Turn off confirm mode,   » Index

File/Disk Full Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
File/Disk full.    There isn't enough space available on the disk for Agenda
                   to complete the current operation.

Attempt to save    Yes.......Save as much of the current file as possible
part of the                  before terminating the operation.
text?
                   No........Terminate the operation without trying to save
                             the current file.

                   If you want to try the operation again, you first need to
                   make more disk space available (such as by deleting some
                   old files).

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   » Index

Detach Note/Macro File Box

SETTING            DESCRIPTION
-----------------  -----------------------------------------------------------
Detach the         Yes.......Detach the external file that is currently
existing                     attached to the note or macro.  The contents of
note/macro file?             this external file are not affected by the
                             detach operation.

                             If you've specified a new external file to
                             attach to the note/macro, Agenda does so after
                             detaching the old external file.

                   No........Cancel the detach request and keep the current
                             external file attached to the note/macro.

SEE ALSO

Fill in a box,   External macro file,   External note file,   » Index

Index

Abandon Current Changes Box
Abandon a File
About Agenda
About Indicators
About Macro Commands
About Printing
Access a Network
Actions
Add Protected Category Box
Add a Column
Add a Section
Add a View
Adjust the Column Width
Advanced Category Settings Box
Agenda Key and Menu Charts
AgendaTown J The Cast J AgendaTown
Alphabetize Categories
Alphabetize View Names
Append to Item/Category Box
Append/Replace Export File Box
Append/Replace Macro Box
Assign Item(s) Box
Assign Marked Items Confirmation Box
Assign an Item to a Category
Assignment Action Value Box
Assignment Condition Value Box
Assignment Profile for an Item
Attach External Note/Macro File Box
Attach Named Set Box
Attach Print Settings Box
Attach a Date Condition
Attach a Date Filter
Attach a Filter
Attach a Numeric Condition
Attach a Numeric Filter
Attach an Assignment Action to a Category
Attach an Assignment Condition to a Category
Attach an External File as a Note
Attach an External Macro File
Attribute Choices Box
Auto-Assign Global Settings Box
Automatic Assignments
Automatic Completion
Back Up a File
Break Assignment Confirmation Box
Break an Item's Assignment
Browse Through Dates
Categories
Category Conversion Confirmation Box
Category Manager
Category Manager Indicators
Category Manager: Accelerator Keys
Category Manager: Final Print Box
Category Manager: Function Keys
Category Manager: Main Menu
Category Manager: Movement and Special Keys
Category Manager: Print Command Menu
Category Manager: Print Layout Box
Category Manager: Print Named Command Menu
Category Properties/Add Box
Category Statistics Box
Change Properties of a Section
Change Screen Colors
Change Unprotected Column Confirmation Box
Change When Date Box
Change a Column Head
Change a Filter
Change the Value of a Condition or Action
Clear Actions Box
Clear Conditions Box
Clear Conditions/Actions Box
Clear Dependencies Box
Clear Note/Macro Box
Clear a Filter, Condition, or Action
Columns
Conditions
Confirm Assignments
Confirm Mode
Copy Conditions/Actions
Copy Conditions/Actions Box
Copy Marked/Current Item(s) Box
Copy Selection Box
Copy a File
Copy the Structure of an Agenda File
Create a Date Category
Create a Datebook View
Create a File
Create a Show View
Custom Colors Box
Damaged File Box
Date Action Value Box
Date Categories
Date Column Properties/Add Box
Date Columns
Date Condition Value Box
Date Filter Box
Default Colors Box
Delete Category Note Entry Box
Delete Macro Box
Delete Marker Box
Delete Note/Macro Box
Delete Show View Box
Demote Category Box
Demotion Conflict Box
Description and Password for a New File
Designate an Item as Done
Detach Note/Macro File Box
Detach Print Settings Box
Discard Category Confirmation Box
Discard Copied Items Box
Discard Current Item Box
Discard Empty View Box
Discard Marked/Current Item(s) Box
Discard Note/Macro Changes Box
Discard Selection Box
Discard Unassigned Item Box
Discard Unused Category Box
Discard View Box
Discard a Category
Discard an Item
Display Format Box
Edit Categories
Edit Items and Categories
Edit Mode
Edit Mode: Copy Box
Edit Mode: Cut Box
Edit Mode: Delete Box
Edit Mode: Marker Box
Empty Trash Box
Enter Categories
Enter Dates and Times
Enter Items
Enter Password Box
Enter a Note
Erase Attached NPS File Box
Erase External Note/Macro File Box
Erase File Confirmation Box
Erase NPS File Confirmation Box
Erase Print Settings Box
Erase a File
Exclusive Children Conflict Box
Explicit and Conditional Assignments
Export File from Note/Macro Box
Export Structured File Box
File Properties Box
File Size Limits
File Statistics Box
File/Disk Full Box
Files
Fill in a Dialog Box
Filters
Find a Help Topic
Get/Release Reservation Box
Global Date Settings Box
Global Protection Settings Box
Go to a Section
Goto Page Box
Header and Footer Box
Help Index
Horizontal Macro Menu
How to Use Help
Import File into Note/Macro Box
Import Structured File Box
Import/Export Information
Import/Export STF Files
Input Format Box
Item Column Properties Box
Item Columns
Item Properties Box
Item Sorting in All/Current Sections Box
Item Statistics Box
Item Undiscard Box
Items
Launch Program Box
Lay Out a Printed Document
Macro Command Syntax
Macro Editor
Macro Editor: Accelerator Keys
Macro Editor: Function Keys
Macro Editor: Movement and Special Keys
Macro Information Box
Macro Input Box
Macro Manager
Macro Manager Indicators
Macro Properties Box
Macros
Make Category Box
Make Item Dependent Box
Make New Item Box
Manipulate a Category List
Manual File Reservation Box
Mark or Unmark Items
Memory Usage Box
Mode & Message Indicators
Modify Column Properties
Move Marked/Current Item(s) Box
Move Sections, Columns, or Items
Move Selection Box
New File Box
Note Editor
Note/Macro File Not Found Box
Notes
Notes/Macro Editor: File Command Menu
Notes/Macro Editor: Final Print Box
Notes/Macro Editor: Main Menu
Notes/Macro Editor: Print Command Menu
Notes/Macro Editor: Print Layout Box
Notes/Macro Editor: Print Named Command Menu
Notes: Accelerator Keys
Notes: Function Keys
Notes: Movement and Special Keys
Numeric Action Value Box
Numeric Categories
Numeric Column Properties/Add Box
Numeric Columns
Numeric Condition Value Box
Numeric Filter Box
Portrait/Landscape Font List
Preview a Printed Document
Print Preview Box
Print Preview Mode
Print Preview: Main Menu
Print Preview: Page Command Menu
Print Setup Box
Print a Document
Promote Category Box
Promotion Conflict (with Assignments) Box
Promotion Conflict (with Exclusivity) Box
Quit Agenda
Read Only File Box
Record a Macro
Remove Assignment Action Box
Remove Assignment Condition Box
Remove Column from Section(s) Box
Remove Column from View Box
Remove Filter Box
Remove Item from Section Box
Remove Marked/Current Item(s) Box
Remove Section Box
Remove Selection Box
Remove Unprotected Column Confirmation Box
Remove a Column
Remove a Section
Replace Existing File Box
Replace File Using 1.0 Version Box
Replace NPS File Box
Replace Note/Macro Text Box
Replace Print Output File Box
Reposition Names in a List
Reposition a Category in the Hierarchy
Represent Keys in a Macro
Reservation Not Available Box
Retrieve Print Settings Box
Retrieve an Existing File
Save File Box
Save Print Settings Box
Save a File
Search & Replace in Note/Macro Box
Search Current View Box
Search for Text in Items and Notes
Section Properties/Add Box
Section Statistics Box
Sections
Select Menu Commands
Select Numeric Functions Box
Select a Category
Select a File
Select from a Choice List
Set Alarm Box
Set Marked Items Done Box
Set Marked/Current Item(s) Done Box
Set Time Box
Set Up Printers
Set an Alarm for an Item
Show Match Box
Show Schedule Box
Show a Schedule for Any Day
Sort Categories Box
Sort Items
Sort Sections in a View
Sorting
Special Variables in Macros
Standard Column Properties/Add Box
Standard Filter Box
Starter Applications
Suspend a Session
The Category Hierarchy
Unassigned Item Discard Box
Undiscard an Item
Unindexed Categories
Unindexed Column Properties/Add Box
Update Defaults Box
Use Backup File Box
Use Child Categories as Section Heads
Use a Category Note as a Column Head
Use a Print Settings File
Use the Pop-Up Calendar
Utilities Customize Box
Utilities Execute Box
Value Range Symbols
Variables in a Macro
Vertical Macro Menu
View Indicators
View Manager
View Properties/Add/Copy Box
View Statistics Box
View Types
Views
Views/Category Manager: Category Command Menu
Views: Accelerator Keys
Views: File Command Menu
Views: File Maintenance Command Menu
Views: File Transfer Command Menu
Views: Final Print Box
Views: Function Keys
Views: Item Command Menu
Views: Main Menu
Views: Movement and Special Keys
Views: Print Command Menu
Views: Print Layout Box
Views: Print Named Command Menu
Views: Utilities Command Menu
Views: Utilities Show Command Menu
Views: Utilities Show Depends Command Menu
Views: Utilities Show Prereqs Command Menu
Views: View Column Command Menu
Views: View Command Menu
Views: View Section Command Menu
When Date for Marked Items Box
When Date for Marked/Current Item(s) Box

Extracted from AGENDA.HLP © 1989, 1990 Lotus Development Corporation
By M Rourke, 2002